2009 Lexus LX 570 Owners Manual
2009 Lexus LX 570 Manual
2009 Lexus LX 570 manual content summary:
- 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1
driving information. 3 Interior features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience. 4 Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-ityourself maintenance, and maintenance information. 5 When trouble - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 2
...105 1 Before driving 1-1. Key information ...26 Keys ...26 1-2. Opening -button start ...30 Wireless remote control ...44 Side doors ...47 Back Head restraints...81 Seat belts ...85 Steering wheel...94 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror ...96 Outside rear view mirrors...97 Opening the fuel tank - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 3
When driving 2-4. Using other driving systems ...203 Cruise control ...203 Dynamic radar cruise control...207 Intuitive parking assist ...219 Rear view monitor system...229 Wide view front & side monitor...232 4-Wheel AHC (Active Height Control Suspension) ...242 AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 4
to the sound library (with DVD player)...395 Listening to a track recorded to the sound library (with DVD player)...400 Editing data recorded to the sound library (with DVD player)...404 Sound library information (with DVD player)...411 Using the AUX adapter...415 Using the steering wheel audio - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 5
navigation system)...456 Using a Bluetooth® phone ...461 Setting the hands-free system (for cellular phone)...476 3-6. Using the interior lights...502 Interior lights list...• Interior lights ...• Personal lights ...• Luggage compartment light...502 503 504 1 505 3-7. Using the storage features - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 6
...602 Electronic key battery ...605 Checking and replacing fuses ...607 Light bulbs...623 5-1. Essential information...636 Emergency flashers...636 If your vehicle needs to be towed...637 If you think something is wrong ...643 Fuel pump shut off system ...644 Event data recorder...645 5-2. Steps - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 7
(fuel, oil level, etc.)...690 Fuel information...700 Tire information...703 6-2. Customization ...714 Customizable features ...714 1 2 3 6-3. Initialization ...720 Items to initialize ...720 4 7 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners...722 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 8
Pictorial index Exterior Side marker light P. 187 Moon roof P. 102 Outside rear view mirrors P. 97 Windshield wipers P. 196 Hood P. 568 Headlights (low beam) P. 187 Turn signal lights P. 175 Fog lights P. 191 Parking lights P. 187 Headlights (high beam) P. 187 8 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 9
Back door P. 52 Rear window defogger P. 338 Rear window wiper Tail lights P. 187 Roof luggage carrier ∗ P. 281 Side doors P. 47 P. 199 Fuel filler door P. 105 Tires l Rotation l Replacement l Inflation pressure l Information License plate lights P. 187 P. 587 P. 660 P. 596 P. 703 Turn signal - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 10
Pictorial index Head restraints Seat belts P. 85 Power window switches P. 100 A Interior P. 81 SRS driver airbag P. 116 SRS front passenger airbag P. 116 Ashtray P. 520 Armrest P. 527 Rear seats P. 60 Rear air conditioning controls P. 334 Floor mat P. 528 Front seats P. 58 SRS side airbags P. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 11
A Vanity mirrors P. 517 Sun visors P. 516 Overhead console P. 509 Lexus link system switches ∗ P. 537 Garage door opener switches P. 531 Rear seat entertainment system ∗ P. 420 Interior light P. 503 Personal lights P. 504 Interior light P. 503 SRS curtain shield airbags P. 116 Moon roof switch P. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 12
Pictorial index B Interior Driving position memory switches P. 77 Door lock switch P. 47 Power window switches P. 100 Window lock switch P. 100 12 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 13
171 Ashtray P. 520 Cigarette lighter P. 521 Shift lever P. 170 AUX adapter P. 415 Power outlet P. 522 Damping mode select switch P. 253 Height select switch P. 242 Crawl Control switch P. 261 Cup holders P. 510 Four-wheel drive control switch P. 254 Shift lock override button P. 675 Parking brake - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 14
Pictorial index Headlight switch P. 187 Turn signal lever P. 175 Fog light switch P. 191 Instrument panel Gauges and meters P. 178 Multi-information display P. 184 Windshield wipers and washer switch P. 196 Rear window wiper and washer switch P. 199 Glove box P. 507 SRS knee airbags P. 116 Tire - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 15
A Without navigation system Touch screen P. 312 Front passenger's seat belt reminder light P. 649 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers P. 338 Air conditioning system P. 322 Audio system P. 340 Clock P. 518 Front passenger AIR BAG ON and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 16
system Instrument panel Touch screen P. 312 Navigation system * Front passenger's seat belt reminder light P. 649 Air conditioning system P. 322 Audio system P. 340 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers P. 338 Clock * P. 518 Front passenger AIR BAG ON and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 17
Audio remote control switches P. 416 Type B Distance switch P. 210 Cruise control switch P. 207 Telephone switch P. 456 DISP switch P. 185 Horn P. 177 Audio remote control switches P. 416 Talk switch P. 323, 341, 468 Cruise control switch P. 203 *: Refer to "Navigation System Owner's Manual". 17 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 18
Pictorial index C Instrument panel Engine (ignition) switch P. 166 Intuitive parking assist switch ∗ P. 219 VIEW switch ∗ P. 232 VSC OFF switch P. 267 Center differential lock/unlock switch P. 254 Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch P. 130 Power back door off switch ∗ P. 53 18 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 19
D Headlight cleaner switch ∗ P. 202 Instrument panel light control P. 179 Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button P. 179 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch P. 94 Power back door switch ∗ P. 53 AFS OFF switch P. 189 Auxiliary box P. 512 Easy access mode switch P. 245 Power outlet - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 20
Pictorial index Luggage compartment Head restraint angle lever P. 82 Seatback handles P. 66 Power outlet P. 522 Seatback angle lever P. 60 Warning reflector holder P. 529 Tools P. 660 20 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 21
A With manual switches Third seat tumbling switch P. 72 Third seat table mode switch P. 72 Third seat lock release lever P. 72 With automatic switches Third seat return switch P. 65 Third seat tumbling switch P. 65 Third seat table mode switch P. 65 Luggage compartment light P. 505 21 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 22
/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, cruise control system, dynamic radar cruise control system, antilock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation. 22 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 23
belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle. Perchlorate Material Special accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 24
to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment. Symbols used in illustrations Safety symbol The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 25
remote control function (→P. 44) Mechanical keys Key number plate n Card key (if equipped) Electronic key Operating the smart access system with push-button start (→P. 30) Mechanical keys The card key comes with an information card that includes instructions for use, Lexus recommends that - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 26
1-1. Key information Using the mechanical key Take out the mechanical key. The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a look cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it. After using the mechanical key, - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 27
information n Card key l The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only in an emergency, such as when the key does not operate properly. l If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button using terminal facing the Lexus emblem. l The - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 28
1-1. Key information NOTICE n To prevent key damage Observe the following: l Do not drop the (To remove the battery cover, lightly grasp it and pull.) If the battery is corroded, by your Lexus dealer, replace the battery. l Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 29
and locking the doors Smart access system with push-button start The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the electronic key.) Locks and unlocks the doors (→P. 31) Locks and unlocks - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Locking and unlocking the doors Side door handle Press the lock button to lock the doors. Pressing and holding the button closes the windows and moon roof. 1 Before driving Grip the handle to unlock the doors. Make sure to touch the sensor on the back - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Press the unlock button to unlock the doors. The door cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked. Lock the back door again when you leave the vehicle.The back door will not lock automatically after it has been opened and then closed. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors n Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected) When locking or unlocking the doors The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door handle. (Only the doors detecting the key can - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 33
the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly. (Way of coping DVDs l When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity l When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby l When carrying or using - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 34
's door handle Exterior: Beeps three to unlock only the driver's times door. Interior: Rings once Hold either door handle to unlock all doors. Exterior: Beeps twice Interior: Rings once STEP 3 Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open one of the doors. If a door is not opened - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 35
for 10 minutes or more The system will resume operation when...l The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch. l The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function (→P. 44) or the mechanical key. (→P. 678) n Electronic key battery depletion l The standard battery - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 36
water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the a glove may not unlock the door. l If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 37
seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. n Alarms and warning indicators A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 38
Correction procedure The "ENGINE START STOP" switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door was open (or the driver's door was Interior alarm pings opened while the "ENGINE START STOP" switch was in continuously*1 ACCESSORY mode) The "ENGINE START STOP" switch was turned OFF while - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 39
key battery Interior alarm driver's door was closed after the key was carried outside the vehicle, and the Interior driver's door again Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle *1: A message will be shown on the multi-information Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 40
and locking the doors n Certification for the smart access system with push-button start U.S.A. FCC ID:NI4TMLF-5 1 NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors 42 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 42
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to smart access system with push-button start can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Wireless remote control The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle. Locks all doors Unlocks all doors Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors. Opens - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 44
the door will set the alarm system. n Electronic key battery depletion →P. 36 n Security feature →P. 38 n If the wireless remote control does not operate properly l Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 678) l Starting the engine: →P. 679 n When the electronic key battery - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 45
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions . Canada NOTE - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 46
, closing and locking the doors Side doors The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switch. n Entry function →P. 31 n Wireless remote control →P. 44 n Door lock switch Locks all doors Unlocks all doors 1 Before driving n Inside lock - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 47
, closing and locking the doors Locking the driver's door from the outside without a key Move the inside lock button to the lock position. STEP 2 Close the door while pulling the door handle. The door cannot be locked if the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 48
STEP 2 Close all the doors and switch the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform step 2 within 20 seconds.) Shift the shift lever to "P" or "N", and press and hold the driver's door lock switch ( or ) for approximately 5 seconds then release. The shift lever and switch positions - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 49
linked door unlocking function Speed linked door locking function Driver's door linked door unlocking function Shift lever position impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate. n Using the mechanical key The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 50
while driving the vehicle. Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury. l Always use a seat belt. l Always lock all doors. l Ensure that all doors are properly closed. l Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 51
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors Back door The back door can be opened using the back door opener. The back door can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switch. n Back door opener STEP 1 Unlocks the back door Raise the back door STEP 2 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 52
closing and locking the doors Power back door (if equipped) Instrument panel The power back door can be opened/closed using the power back door switch or wireless remote control. (→P. 44) Push and hold the switch to close or open. (A buzzer sounds.) 1 Before driving Back door Pressing the switch - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 53
the back door is closed. l The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in OFF or ACCESSORY mode, and lower side of the back door is closed. n When closing the back before closing the upper side of the back door. l Lower the back door using the back door handle, and make sure to push the back door down from - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 54
operation to prevent the power back door from rapidly falling down. n Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. switch operation) can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 716) CAUTION Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 55
can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death. n Jam protection function (vehicles with power back door) l Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally. l The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 56
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors NOTICE n To prevent damage to the back door components l Do not apply force to the back door dumpers and keep the dumpers free of paint and other foreign matter. l Make sure there is nothing in the doorway before closing. l Do not allow more than one - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 57
) Front seats Seat position fore/aft control switch Seatback angle control switch Seat cushion (front) angle control switch Vertical height control switch Lumber support control switch Seat cushion length adjustment switch (driver's side only) Active head restraint When a front seatback receives - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 58
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to move. This does not indicate a problem. 1 CAUTION n Seat adjustment l Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage. l Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Rear seats Second seat Seatback angle adjustment lever Seat position adjustment switch Third seat 60 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 60
the second seats and third seat entry For easy access to the third seat, perform ond seats" (→P. 62). n Before tumbling the second seats STEP 1 STEP 1 in "Tumbling the sec1 Stow the seat belt buckles and lower the head restraints to the lowest position. Before driving STEP 2 Pass the outer seat - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) n Tumbling the second seats STEP 1 Fold down the seatback while pulling the seatback angle adjustment lever, and swing the whole seat up and forward. STEP 2 Hook the holding strap to the assist grip and secure the seat by pulling its - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) STEP 3 Remove the seat hook covers from the back of the seat cushion, and install them on the seat hooks. When returning the second seat to its original position, remove the seat hook covers from the floor and install them in the back of - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 63
third seats STEP 1 Stow the seat belts buckles. STEP 2 STEP 3 Stow the center head restraint in the seatback. (→P. 83) Pass the outer seat belts through the seat belt hangers seat belts are removed from the hangers before using them. STEP 4 Stow the center seat belt tabs in the cover set in the roof - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) n Folding down the third seatback For right side For left side 1 Before driving The seat will automatically fold when the switch is pressed. 65 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 65
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) n Folding up the third seats STEP 1 Perform following steps in "Before folding the third seats". (→P. 64) If the switch is pressed and held, STEP 2 the seat will automatically fold and lift sideward. ( - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 66
, operation will stop and a buzzer will sound continuously. STEP 3 Pull the handle and raise the seatbacks. Fix the handle securely in its original position after use. STEP 4 Raise the head restraints. 67 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 67
. The seat movement is stopped in a half way when the back door is opened. Correction procedure Buzzer sounds for 10 seconds Indicator light on* Indicator light flashes* Move the shift lever in the "P" position with the engine start stop switch in ignition on mode. Return the third seat from - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 68
Indicator light and buzzer Situation Automatic tumbling or return operation is stopped because of a system problem. The seat is not moved to the table mode from the original position after 10 seconds the tumbling switch is pressed. Correction procedure Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 69
Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Indicator light and buzzer Situation Correction procedure Indicator light flashes Indicator light flashes 3 times Any of the tumbling or return . *: A warning will be shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster. 70 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 70
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Folding the third seats (Manual type) n Before folding the third seats STEP 1 Stow the seat belts buckles. 1 Before driving STEP 2 STEP 3 Stow the center head restraint in the seatback.(→P. 83) Pass the outer seat belts through the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 71
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) n Folding down the third seatback The seat will automatically fold when the switch is pressed. 72 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 72
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) n Folding up the third seats STEP 1 Perform following steps in "Before folding the third seats". (→P. 71) If the switch is pressed and held, STEP 2 the seat will automatically fold and lift sideward. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 73
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) STEP 4 Remove the seat hook covers from the underside of the seat cushion, and install them on the seat hooks. n Returning the third seats STEP 1 Remove the seat hook covers from the floor and install them into the underside of the seat - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 74
mirrors, steering wheel) STEP 3 Pull the handle and raise the seatbacks. Fix the handle securely in its original position after use. 1 Before driving STEP 4 Raise the head restraints. CAUTION n Seat adjustment Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 75
properly. l Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat. l Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use. n Avoiding damage to seat components Do not hang or attach anything on the seatback striker. NOTICE n Before tumbling, folding up the seats The seat - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 76
, steering wheel) Driving position memory system Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be entered into the computer's memory and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 77
before performing the following: Using the wireless remote control STEP 1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to OFF and close the driver's door. While pressing the desired button STEP 2 ("1", "2" or "3"), press on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps. The driving position is recalled - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 78
unlock side on the door lock switch (either the driver or passenger side) until the signal beeps. The driving position is recalled when the driver's door is unlocked using the enter function or wireless remote control and the driver's door is opened. 1 Before driving n Canceling the linked door - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 79
mirrors, steering wheel) n Retained accessory power Each memorized position (except for the steering wheel position) can be activated within 30 seconds after the driver's door is opened, even if the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned off. n To cancel seat position recall Perform any one of the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 80
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Head restraints Front seats Vertical adjustment Lock release button Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint. 1 Before driving Angle adjustment Second seats Vertical adjustment Lock release button Press - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 81
the height of the head restraints Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. n Adjusting the second center seat head restraint Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using. 82 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 82
in the screwdriver, pull up the head restraint. n Installing the third outboard seat head restraints STEP 1 Align the head restraint with the installation holes. STEP 2 Push down the head restraint to the lock position. n When not using the third center seat head restraint Open the zipper on the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 83
. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. l Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. l Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. l After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position. l Do - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 84
Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Seat belts Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. n Correct use of the seat belts l Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 85
be correctly located and securely latched for proper operation. Make sure that the buckle with the gray buckle release button is securely latched for ready use of the center seat belt. 86 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 86
such as when removing the third seat. STEP 1 To release the hooked tab, insert the mechanical key into the hole on the buckle with the light gray buckle release button. 1 Before driving STEP 2 Stow the seat belt tabs as shown. n Extracting the belt Pull the belt out partially, then remove the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 87
of sudden braking, the seat belts lessen collision injury by retracting the slack in the front seat belts before the collision, thus restraining the driver and passenger at an earlier stage. (→P. 272) n Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 88
seat passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 89
of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. l Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 137) follow the instructions on P. 85 regarding seat belt usage. l When the Lexus dealer free of charge. 90 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 90
should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more 1 Before driving than one person at once, including children. l Lexus recommends that Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 91
Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belt cannot belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 92
the seat belt without the extender. l Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by Before driving another person, or at and drive safely and responsibly. NOTICE n When using a seat belt extender When releasing the seat belt - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 93
wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Up Down Toward the driver Away from the driver Auto tilt away When the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned OFF, the steering wheel returns to its stowed - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 94
components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) n Automatic adjustment of the steering position A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (→P. 77) 1 CAUTION n While driving Before driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 95
components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Anti-glare inside rear view mirror In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduces the reflected light. Turns auto mode on/off The indicator comes on when auto mode is turned on. The mirror will - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 96
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Outside rear view mirrors Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. STEP 1 Select a mirror to adjust Left Right 1 Before driving STEP 2 Adjust the mirror Up - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 97
will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (→P. 96) n Linked mirror function when reversing The outside rear view mirrors mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (→P. 77) 98 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 98
mirrors while driving. l Do not drive with the mirrors folded back. l Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly 1 Before driving adjusted before driving. the mirror Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the mirror. 99 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 99
switch Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches. Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a using the mechanical key. (→P. 678) (→P. 44) l The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. l The power windows can be closed using the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 100
the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. They cannot, however, be Lexus dealer Before driving Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features Jam protection function l Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 101
windows and moon roof Moon roof Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down. n Opening and closing Open Stops just before it is opened fully. Press the switch again to fully open. Close To stop partway, press the switch lightly. n Tilt up and down STE - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 102
be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (→P. 678) l The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (→P. 44) l The moon roof can be closed using the entry function. can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 103
the multi-information display in the instrument panel when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned OFF and the driver's door is opened with the moon roof open. n Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 104
the fuel tank cap Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap. n Before refueling the vehicle Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed. n Opening the fuel tank cap STEP 1 1 Before driving Pull the lever. STEP 2 Turn the fuel tank - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 105
the fuel tank cap When replacing the fuel tank cap, turn it until a clicking sound is heard. After releasing your hand, the cap will turn slightly to the opposite direction. n Fuel types Use premium unleaded gasoline. (91 Octane Rating [Research Octane Number 96] or higher) n Fuel tank capacity - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 106
not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury. NOTICE n Refueling Do not spill fuel during refueling. Failure to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 107
been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer. Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. The indicator light flashes after the "ENGINE START STOP" switch has been turned OFF to indicate that the system is operating. n System maintenance The vehicle has - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 108
certification U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1 1 NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two the user's authority to operate the equipment. Canada NOTE: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 109
system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is detected. n Triggering of the alarm The alarm is triggered in the following situations. l A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function or the wireless remote control. (The doors will lock again - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 110
doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds. The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set. 1 Before to deactivate or stop the alarm. l Unlock the doors using the entry function or the wireless remote control. l Start the engine. (The alarm will be - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 111
a door or hood. l The battery is reconnected. n Panic mode When is pressed for longer than about one second, the head lights/tail lights/emergency flashers will flash, the front and rear interior lights will come on, and an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds to deter any person from trying to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 112
1-6. Theft deterrent system Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.) These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law. 1 Before driving 113 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 113
information Correct the extent required. (→P. 58) Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable. Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the is facing your chest. (→P. 94) Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 114
driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. l Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. 1 A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 115
the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury. Front airbags Driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components. Knee airbags Can help provide driver and front passenger protection. 116 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 116
1-7. Safety information Side and curtain shield airbags Side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants. Side airbags Can help protect the torso of the second outboard seat occupants. Curtain shield airbags l Can help protect primarily the head of front seat occupants. l Can - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 117
and curtain shield airbag sensor Side airbag (front seat) SRS warning light and "RSCA OFF" indicator light Curtain shield airbag sensor STE Side airbag (second outboard seat) Driver airbag Driver's seat position sensor Driver's seat belt buckle switch Floor sensor Roll sensing of curtain shield - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 118
information Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver be emitted. l Parts of the airbag module - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 119
1-7. Safety information n Operating conditions (front airbags) l The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 120
Safety information n Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli- sion The SRS front, side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration. l Hitting a curb, edge - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 121
1-7. Safety information n Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (side airbags and curtain shield airbags) The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 122
information n When to contact your Lexus dealer In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer, as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus garnish, or roof interior containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 123
the seat if your vehicle has that feature. • If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 124
can be killed or seri- ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 125
1-7. Safety information CAUTION n SRS airbag precautions l Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard. l Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger. l Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 126
toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle. l Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 127
1-7. Safety information CAUTION n SRS airbag precautions l Do not attach anything to areas area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it. l Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. l - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 128
information CAUTION n SRS airbag precautions l If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 129
(roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off) indicator light turns on. (Only when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF.) n This switch only should be used In a situation where the inflation is not desired (such as during extreme off road driving). n Operating conditions when the "RSCA OFF" indicator - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 130
1-7. Safety information Front passenger occupant classification system Your vehicle is equipped with a front activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger. 1 Before driving SRS warning light AIR BAG OFF indicator light AIR BAG ON indicator light Front passenger's seat belt reminder - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 131
1-7. Safety information Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system n Adult*1 AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights SRS warning light Front passenger's seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag and knee airbag Side airbag in the front passenger seat - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 132
1-7. Safety information n Unoccupied AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights SRS warning light Front passenger's seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag and knee airbag Side airbag in the front passenger seat Devices Curtain shield airbag on the front passenger side Front passenger's - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 133
1-7. Safety information n System malfunction AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights SRS warning light Front passenger's seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for installing the child restraint system properly. (→P. 142) 134 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 134
reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger side may not activate - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 135
passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction in the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately. l Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 136
1-7. Safety information Child restraint systems A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems. 1 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 137
1-7. Safety information Types of child restraints Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child. Rear facing-Infant seat/convertible seat Forward facing-Convertible seat Booster seat 138 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 138
1-7. Safety information n When installing the child restraint system on the front passenger seat When you have to use a child restraint system the lowest posi- tion n Selecting an appropriate child restraint system l Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 139
information CAUTION n Using a child restraint system The use , or between you and the vehicle's interior. l Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that front passenger seat even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light illuminates. In the event of an accident, the force of - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 140
information CAUTION n Child restraint precautions l Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the 1 Before driving child should be used to cut the belt. n When the child restraint system is not in use l Keep - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 141
information Installing child restraints Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure the child restraints to the outboard second seats using a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver's seat belt) Anchor bracket (for top tether strap) Anchor brackets - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 142
1-7. Safety information Installation with LATCH system STEP 1 Fold the seatback forward and then adjust it as upright as possible. 1 Before driving STEP 2 Take off the covers between - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 143
1-7. Safety information Type A Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors. STEP 4 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 144
1-7. Safety information Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt) n Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/Convertible seat Fold the seatback while pulling the STEP 1 seatback angle lever. Return the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 145
1-7. Safety information STEP 4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the ALR lock mode. Lock mode allows the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 146
1-7. Safety information n Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible seat Fold the seatback while pulling the STEP 1 seatback angle lever. Return the seatback and secure it at the first lock position. (→P. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 147
1-7. Safety information STEP 4 Fully extend the shoulder strap and then allow it to retract slightly into the ALR lock mode. Lock mode allows the seat belt to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 148
1-7. Safety information n Booster seat STEP 1 Fold the seatback while pulling the seatback child in the booster seat. Fit the seat belt to the booster seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Check that the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 149
information Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt. Child restraint systems with a top tether strap STEP 1 Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or lower anchors, and do the following. Outside Adjust the head - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 150
1-7. Safety information Outside STEP 2 Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto . Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. STEP 3 Outside only: Adjust the head restraint to the downmost position. n Laws and regulations pertaining to Anchors The LATCH system conforms to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 151
information given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in of sudden braking or an accident. l If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and OFF indicator light illuminates. Failing to do so may result in death - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 152
1-7. Safety information CAUTION n When installing a child restraint system l When using the LATCH anchors for a child restraint all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac- turer. n Do not use a seat belt extender If a seat belt extender is used when installing - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 153
1-7. Safety information CAUTION n To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors l When using the LATCH anchors, be the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. l When using the left side lower anchors for the child restraint system, do not sit in the center - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 154
2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving. n Starting the engine (→P. 166) n Driving STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to "D". (→P. 170) STEP 2 Release the parking brake. (→P. 176) Gradually release the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 155
an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly. n Breaking in your new Lexus To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe: l For the first - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 156
replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding-down. n Operating your vehicle in a foreign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 157
to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle. l If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 158
outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury. l Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 159
control the vehicle, resulting in an accident. l Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident. l After driving through a puddle, lightly that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior. l - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 160
Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the the vehicle unattended while the engine is running. l Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 161
joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes. l The brake system consists - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 162
use accidentally depressed. n Avoiding damage to vehicle parts l Do not turn the steering wheel steering pump. l When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag- ing noise (brake pad wear limit indicators) Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 163
the vehicle. l It may be difficult to control your vehicle. l The vehicle will make abnormal sounds. l The vehicle will behave abnormally. Replace a flat tire with a new one. (→P. 664) n When encountering flooded roads 2 When driving Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 164
Starting the engine STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set. STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in "P". STEP 3 Sit in the driver's seat and firmly depress the brake pedal. The "ENGINE START STOP" switch indicator turns green. STEP 4 Press the "ENGINE START STOP" switch. Continue depressing - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 165
2-1. Driving procedures n Changing "ENGINE START STOP" switch mode OFF mode* Emergency flashers can be used. ACCESSORY mode Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. The "ENGINE START STOP" switch indicator turns amber. 2 When driving IGNITION ON mode All electrical - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 166
The green indicator light on the "ENGINE START STOP" switch will flash and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. Press the Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. n Auto power off function If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 167
the engine Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator while starting the n To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods without the engine running. n When starting the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 168
2-1. Driving procedures Automatic transmission Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions. n Shifting the shift lever While the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever. 170 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 169
driving*1 "S" mode driving* (→P. 172) When driving 2 2 *1: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the "D" position for normal driving. *2: By selecting shift ranges using "S" mode, you can control engine braking forces. n Selecting a driving mode The following - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 170
2-1. Driving procedures Changing shift ranges in "S" mode Shift the shift lever to the "S" position and operate the shift lever. Upshifting Downshifting The initial shift range in "S" mode is automatically set to "5" or "4" according to the vehicle's speed. However, the initial shift range may be - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 171
2-1. Driving procedures n Shift ranges and their functions Shift range 6 5 4 3 2 1 Function Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. Automatically - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 172
performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.) n When driving with the cruise control your Lexus dealer the driver performance and driving - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 173
n Turn signals can be operated when The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode. n If the indicators flash faster than usual Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 174
2-1. Driving procedures Parking brake Sets the parking brake U.S.A. Canada Fully set the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal. Releases the parking with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. 176 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 175
2-1. Driving procedures Horn n To sound the horn To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark. 2 When driving 177 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 176
2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target region. The Displays the charge state. Speedometer Displays the vehicle speed. Multi-information display →P. 184 Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank. 178 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 177
since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently. Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset . 2 When driving Instrument panel light control The brightness of the instrument panel light can be adjusted. Darker Brighter 179 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 178
completely. (→P. 685) n While driving l When the voltmeter indicates more than 19 V or less than 9 V, the battery may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer. l When the engine oil pressure gauge does not work properly, immediately stop the engine and contact your - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 179
2-2. Instrument cluster Indicators and warning lights The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle's various systems. Instrument cluster 2 When driving The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 180
inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle's various systems. Turn signal indicator (→P. 175) Headlight high beam indicator (→P. 187) Headlight indicator (→P. 187) Tail light indicator (→P. 187) Fog light indicator (→P. 191) "AFS OFF" indicator (→P. 189) Cruise control indicator - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 181
2-2. Instrument cluster n Warning lights Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle's systems. (→P. 647) * * (U.S.A.) * * (Canada) * (U.S.A.) * (Canada) * (U.S.A.) * (Canada) * * * (if equipped) 2 When driving *: These lights turn on when the "ENGINE START - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 182
the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data. l Trip information (→P. 185) Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruisingrelated information. l Intuitive parking assist display (→P. 220) Automatically displayed when using intuitive parking assist. l Dynamic radar cruise control - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 183
can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining. l This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. l When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. 185 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 184
Liquid crystal display Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem to continue using the display. NOTICE n The multi-information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 185
wipers Headlight switch The headlights can be operated manually or automatically. Type A The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on. The headlights and all lights listed above turn on. The headlights and all lights listed above turn on and off automatically - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 186
license plate and instrument panel lights turn on. The headlights and all lights listed above turn on. The headlights and all lights listed above turn on and lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off. U.S.A. Canada Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams. Release the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 187
make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night. n Headlight control sensor The sensor may not function properly - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 188
START STOP" switch has been switched to ACCESSORY or OFF mode. l When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is switched to ACCESSORY or OFF mode and driver's door is opened. To turn the lights on again, turn the "ENGINE START STOP - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 189
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers Fog light switch The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. The fog lights can be used when the headlights are on low beam. Type A Off On 2 When driving 191 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 190
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers Type B Off On 192 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 191
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers Windshield wipers and washer (Type A) With "AUTO" selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 192
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers n The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode. n Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation Vehicle speed affects the wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 193
lights °C] or cold at less than 14°F [-10°C]). n Windshield wiper features The rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers automatically turn on a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged. n When using an automatic car wash Set the wiper switch to "OFF". If the wiper switch is in - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 194
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers Windshield wipers and washer (Type B) With "AUTO" selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 195
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers n The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode. n Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation Vehicle speed affects the wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 196
lights °C] or cold at less than 14°F [-10°C]). n Windshield wiper features The rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers automatically turn on with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged. n When using an automatic car wash Set the wiper switch to . If the wiper switch is in " - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 197
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers Rear window wiper and washer Type A Intermittent window wiper operation Normal window wiper operation Washer operation Washer/wiper dual operation 2 When driving 199 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 198
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers Type B Intermittent window wiper operation Normal window wiper operation Washer operation Washer/wiper dual operation 200 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 199
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers n The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 717) NOTICE n When the rear window is dry Do not use the wiper, as it may - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 200
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers Headlight cleaner switch (if equipped) Washer fluid can be the headlight switch is turned on. NOTICE n When the washer fluid tank is empty Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause the washer fluid pump to overheat. 202 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 201
other driving systems Cruise control (if equipped) Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator. Indicator Cruise control switch 2 When driving n Set the vehicle speed STEP 1 Press the "ON-OFF" button to activate the cruise control. Press the button once more - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 202
of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph [1.6 km/ h]) can be made by lightly pushing the lever up or down and releasing it. n Canceling and resuming regular acceleration Cancel Pull the lever towards you to cancel cruise control. The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 203
cruise control indicator light flashes Turn the "ON-OFF" button off once, and then reactivate the system. If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Contact your Lexus dealer - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 204
-OFF" button off when not in use. n Situations unsuitable for cruise control Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or fatal accident. l In heavy traffic l On roads with sharp bends l On slippery - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 205
2-4. Using other driving systems Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped) Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 206
2-4. Using other driving systems n Set the vehicle speed STEP 1 Press the "ON-OFF" button to activate the cruise control. Press the button once more to deactivate. STEP 2 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set. 208 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 207
2-4. Using other driving systems n Selecting conventional constant speed control mode Press the "ON-OFF" button to activate the cruise control. Press the button once more to deactivate the cruise control. Switch to constant speed control mode. (Push the lever away from you and hold for - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 208
2-4. Using other driving systems n Canceling and resuming the speed setting Cancel Pull the lever towards you to cancel cruise control. The setting is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed. Resume To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up. Resuming is - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 209
2-4. Using other driving systems Cruising in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode This mode employs a radar sensor 2 When driving Example of constant speed cruising When there are no vehicles ahead The vehicle travels at the set speed by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 210
the brakes to ensure appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance. n Warning lights and messages for dynamic radar cruise control Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (→P. 657) n Switching modes - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 211
2-4. Using other driving systems n The dynamic radar cruise can be set when l The shift lever is in "D" or the there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. n Automatically canceling constant speed control The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 212
as snow, ice or plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.) Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected. If the dynamic radar cruise control is used on a road with very light traffic and very little to reflect the radar waves emitted by the radar sensor - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 213
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. FCC RF exposure Information This device complies with the FCC RF exposure requirements. For vehicles sold in Canada When driving Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 214
dynamic radar cruise control Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or fatal accident. l In heavy traffic l On roads with sharp bends l On winding roads l On slippery roads, such as - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 215
Using the same lane n Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function 2 When driving correctly Apply the brakes as upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.) l When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow l When steering wheel operation or your - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 216
Using Replace them with non-genuine parts n Handling the radar sensor Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively. area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer. l Do not disassemble the sensor. l Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 217
using the multi-information display, the touch screen, and warning beeps. n Sensor types 2 When driving Front corner sensors Rear corner sensors Back sensors n Intuitive parking assist switch On/off To turn the system on, press the switch. The indicator light comes on to inform the driver - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 218
2-4. Using other driving systems n Multi-information display Front corner sensor detection Rear corner sensor detection Back sensor detection n or the wide view front & side monitor is displayed (insert display) A simplified image is displayed on the touch screen when an obstacle is detected. 220 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 219
2-4. Using other driving systems Sensor detection display, obstacle distance n Corner sensors Approximate distance to obstacle Front: 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.6 ft. (47.5 cm) Rear: 2.0 ft. (60 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 220
2-4. Using other driving systems n Back sensors Approximate distance to obstacle Multi-information display Touch screen (insert display) 5.0 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm) (continuous) 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.4 ft. (45 cm) (continuous) 1.4 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 221
2-4. Using other driving systems Beeps and obstacle distance A beep sounds when the corner sensors and back sensors are operating. l The beep sounds faster as the vehicle - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 222
2-4. Using other driving systems Obstacle detection range About 1.8 ft. (60 cm) About 5.0 ft. (150 cm) The detection area of the sensors is shown to the left. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 223
2-4. Using other driving systems Warning beep volume and touch screen settings You can change the warning beep volume and touch screen operating conditions. STEP 1 STEP 2 Press Touch to display the "Information" screen. . 2 n Changing the warning beep volume STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch Touch a switch ( - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 224
information problem.) • The sensor is covered in any way. • In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather. • When driving on bumpy, sloped or gravel roads curb or a curb corner. • If towing eyelet is installed on your vehicle. • The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact. • A non-genuine Lexus - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 225
following cases, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. l If the bumper is damaged. l If the intuitive parking assist indicator light remains on without a beep sounds. n Certification For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 226
unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident. l Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h). l When always check your surroundings for safety and drive carefully. l Do not install accessories within the sensors' detection areas. NOTICE n When washing the vehicle Do - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 227
2-4. Using other driving systems Rear view monitor system (if equipped) The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed in reverse on the screen. This allows the image to appear in the same manner as that - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 228
on the screen. The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions. n Rear view monitor system camera In the following cases, it may be difficult to see the images on the screen, even when the system is functioning correctly. • In the dark (e.g. at night - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 229
light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below it. 2 When driving CAUTION n When using position and mounting angle may change. Contact your Lexus dealer. l Rapid temperature changes, such as when it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 230
vehicle and the blind spots to the front of the vehicle. This system helps the driver check for approaching cars, bicycles and pedestrians when at intersections with poor visibility. The side monitor uses a camera installed in the passenger's side outside rear view mirror to display on screen the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 231
displayed first, regardless of the screen mode. Wide view front monitor Side monitor 2 When driving n Wide view front monitor The image from the front camera is displayed. Use this monitor to help check the area in front of the vehicle for safety, for example in intersections with poor visibility - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 232
2-4. Using other driving systems n Side monitor The image from the side camera is displayed (the right front view is expanded and displayed). Use this monitor to help check the area to the right of the vehicle, for example when taking off and stopping, when turning right, etc. 234 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 233
can be used. 3 screen mode: The wide view front & side monitor simultaneous display or the individual display can be used. The display the wide view front & side monitor simultaneous display screen while the Lexus parking assist monitor is displayed, it is not possible to switch to the 3 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 234
2-4. Using other driving systems n Changing the display in 3 screen mode When in 3 screen mode, you can change the display from the simultaneous display to each individual - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 235
Using there will be a slight difference between the image displayed when the outside rear view mirrors are base of the outside rear view mirrors will be in the way. n When switched to from the Lexus from the Lexus parking assist monitor, the icon display area will flash to inform the driver that the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 236
2-4. Using other driving systems n Displayed area Front camera Masking This section is masked to avoid creating a false sense of distance in front of the vehicle. Camera's field of view Objects visible to the camera Objects not visible to the camera Parts of the vehicle (bumper, grill, etc.) 238 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 237
Using other displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions. n Wide view front & side monitor cameras Side camera Front camera In the following cases, it may be difficult to see the images on the screen, even when the system is functioning correctly In the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 238
2-4. Using other driving systems n Smear effect If a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by the camera, a smear effect* peculiar to the camera may occur. *: Smear effect -A phenomenon that occurs when a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 239
may change. Contact your Lexus dealer. l Rapid image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted when the system is cold. l Situations unsuitable for wide view front & side monitor • On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow. • When using tire chains or emergency tires. • On roads - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 240
2-4. Using other driving systems 4-Wheel AHC (Active Height Control Suspension) The 4-Wheel AHC adjusts the vehicle height in accordance with driving conditions. There are 3 selectable modes, "HI" (high), "N" (normal), and "LO" (low). Easy access mode switch Height control switch Height select - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 241
2-4. Using other driving systems Selecting vehicle height Higher Lower 2 When driving Display Current mode The vehicle is in the "N" (normal) height mode in the illustration. and show directions in which it is possible to adjust the vehicle height. Height up Height down Height control "OFF" - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 242
2-4. Using other driving systems Vehicle height modes Push the height select switch to . (60 mm) higher at the rear than the normal mode height. This mode is suitable when driving on bumpy roads or through water. High height mode is only available when the vehicle speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). n - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 243
Using other driving systems Conditions for changing the vehicle height mode Some modes may not be selectable depending on the vehicle speed when the four-wheel drive control indicator light will flash to alert the driver and surrounding people that the vehicle is lowering. The indicator light stops - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 244
lowering operation and raise the vehicle again: • Press the height control switch. • Push the height select switch to "∧". Disabling the height control Push while the vehicle is stopped. The "OFF" indicator will appear on the multi-information display, and the vehicle height will be fixed in the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 245
selected. l Extra high mode cannot be manually selected. n Turning off the 4-Wheel AHC l The system will remain off until the height control "OFF" switch is pushed again, 2 n When driving on bumpy roads with the four-wheel drive control switch in "L4" High mode is automatically selected. 247 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 246
2-4. Using other driving systems n mode • Up to 4 occupants* plus approximately 419 lb. (190 kg) in the high mode *: average weight 150 lb. (68 kg) per person l If the vehicle height cannot be raised when in the normal contact with the road surface, the vehicle height cannot be raised/lowered. 248 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 247
seconds or longer while the vehi- cle is stopped. (Except when the four-wheel drive control switch is in "L4".) l The suspension fluid temperature is lower than -22°F (-30°C). l Driving on bumpy roads which may cause the suspension to fully elongate. l If the steering wheel is abruptly turned more - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 248
2-4. Using other driving systems n Propeller shaft noise on the location of the malfunction. The warning message is displayed on the multi-information display, and the 4Wheel AHC cannot be activated until the malfunction is corrected. vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 250 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 249
the high mode These modes should only be used for rough off-road conditions. Because the vehicle's center of gravity is higher when in these modes, the vehicle may become unstable when turning abruptly, resulting in an accident. n - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 250
2-4. Using other driving systems NOTICE n To avoid damage to the vehicle l After . l Do not select the low mode when driving on bumpy roads, as the underbody of the vehicle may contact the road surface. l When travelling on bumpy roads or through water, or when towing, turn off easy access mode - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 251
2-4. Using other driving systems AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension) AVS controls the suspension according to the road and driving conditions. Selecting an optimum driving mode allows good riding comfort and stability. For driving on a bumpy road For ordinary driving such as in the city traffic For - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 252
Four-wheel drive system Use the four-wheel drive control switch and center differential lock/unlock switch to select the following transfer and center differential modes. n Four-wheel drive control switch "H4" (high speed position) Normal driving on all types of roads. "L4" (low speed position - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 253
the vehicle completely. STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to "N". STEP 3 Push and shift the four-wheel drive control switch to "L4". Maintain this condition until the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light turns on. 2 n Shifting from "L4" to "H4" STEP 1 Stop the vehicle completely. STEP 2 Shift the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 254
2-4. Using other driving systems Neutral position Shifting to the neutral position cuts the following procedure. STEP 2 Confirm the following: l The four wheel-drive control switch is in "H4". (The low speed fourwheel drive indicator light is not illuminated.) If the switch is in "L4", turn it to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 255
2-4. Using other driving systems STEP 9 Shift the four-wheel drive control switch to "L4", then shift to "H4" again. When shifting the four-wheel drive control switch, push the switch down while turning it. The low speed four-wheel drive indicator light will flash slowly (turns on and off every 2 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 256
shift lever to the "2" range of "S" while driving in steep off-road areas, the output of the brake can be controlled effectively by the active traction control system, which assists the driver to control the driving power of 4 wheels. l Use the "1" range of "S" of the shift lever for maximum power - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 257
cruise control system is on, cancel the cruise control system. n If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock 2 indicator light blinks l If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light continues to blink when using by your Lexus dealer immediately. 259 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 258
Never move the four-wheel drive control switch if the wheels have lost traction. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE n To prevent damage to the center differential l For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, unlock the center differential. l Unlock - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 259
2-4. Using other driving systems Crawl Control Allows travel on extremely rough off-road surfaces at a fixed low speed without pressing the accelerator or brake pedal. Minimizes loss of traction or vehicle slip when driving on slippery road surfaces, allowing for stable driving. n Crawl Control - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 260
turns off, or drive extremely carefully. n The Crawl Control can be operated when l The engine is running. l The shift lever is in any gear other than "P" or "N". l The four-wheel drive control switch is in "L4". l The parking brake is released. l The driver's door is closed. l When the driving mode - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 261
brake system overheats 2 When driving The system will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.) n If the automatic transmission system overheats The system will cease operation, a buzzer - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 262
be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. CAUTION n When using Crawl Control Do not rely overmuch on the Crawl Control. This function does not extend the vehicle's performance limitations. Always thoroughly check the road conditions, and drive safely. n Conditions under which the system may not - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 263
2-4. Using other driving systems Driving assist systems To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems Vehicle Stability Control) Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces. n Active TRAC (Traction Control) Maintains - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 264
2-4. Using other driving systems When the VSC/Active TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, rolling backwards when starting on an incline, or if the wheels spin, the slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC/ Active TRAC/hill-start - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 265
Using . The slip indicator light should come on. Active TRAC will stop the control of the engine. However, the brake will remain to be controlled. Push the button and VSC. The slip indicator light will come on and "VSC OFF" will be shown on the multi-information display. Push the button again to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 266
off VSC system. The center differential lock indicator light will come on and "VSC OFF" will be shown on the multiinformation display. Push the switch again to turn the system back on. n Active TRAC can be turned off when The four-wheel drive control switch is in "H4" and the center differential - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 267
2-4. Using other driving systems n If the brake system overheats The Active TRAC, VSC and hill-start assist control will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in a safe place (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.) n Sounds and vibrations - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 268
the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost. n If the hill-start assist control does not operate effectively The hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice. n When Active TRAC and VSC are off Be especially careful and drive - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 269
correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels. n Handling of tires and suspension 2 When driving Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 270
Using of the pretensioner is increased (→P. 88), to help prepare the driver and passengers. In the event of sudden braking or skidding, the road ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position, speed, and heading of the obstacles. When traveling on a road with very light - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 271
2-4. Using other driving systems n Obstacles not detected The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the radar sensor cannot - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 272
2-4. Using other driving narrow iron bridge l When there is a metal object on the road surface l When driving on an uneven road surface l When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn l When malfunction in the system Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (→P. 647, 657) 274 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 273
2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION n Handling the impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer. l Do not disassemble the sensor. l Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding 2 for any obstacles or other road hazards. 275 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 274
clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems. l It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 275
of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control. l Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 276
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico: To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations. l State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments l State Motor Vehicle Bureau l Recreational Vehicle Clubs l U.S. Forest Service - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 277
If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur. l When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 278
deep water. n Inspection after off-road driving l Sand and mud that has perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the "Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 279
luggage Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load. l Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible. Be sure all items are secured in place. l Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 280
2-5. Driving information Adjusting the position of cross rails STEP 1 Turn the knobs counterclockwise to release the cross rails. STEP 2 Slide the cross rails to the appropriate position for loading luggage and turn the knobs clockwise to tighten the cross rails securely. 282 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 281
and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 282
2-5. Driving information Example on your vehicle Cargo capacity Total load capacity When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 1230 lb. (560 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 283
2-5. Driving information CAUTION n Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver's vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident. • Feet of the driver • Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 284
the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury. n Roof luggage carrier precautions To use the roof rails as - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 285
2-5. Driving information CAUTION n Cross rail adjustment Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by pushing forward and rearward them. Failure to do so may cause an - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 286
not exceed the total load capacity. n Towing capacity: 8500 lb. (3855 kg) Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that you vehicle is able to tow. n Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 287
manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions. n Pre-winter preparations l Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures. • Engine oil • Engine coolant • Washer fluid l Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte. l Have - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 288
Perform the following according to the driving conditions. l Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. l To ensure proper operation of the climate control road - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 289
2 When driving Regulations on the use of tire chains l Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before rear tires. l Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying man- ual. 291 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 290
information CAUTION n Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. l Use being used or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower. l Avoid driving on bumpy road - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 291
2-5. Driving information NOTICE n Repairing or replacing snow tires Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 292
vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer. To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 293
2-5. Driving information Weight limits Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combined weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits. l The gross trailer weight must never exceed 8500 lb. (3856 kg). l The gross combined weight must never - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 294
. The maximum allowable gross trailer weight. Towing capacity is calculated considering the base vehicle with necessary vehicle equipment and occupants. Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the towing capacity, gross trailer weight includes the trailer - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 295
to the following instructions. The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load is 9 to 11%. (Tongue load / Gross trailer weight × 100 = 9 to 11%) If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lbs. (900 kg), it is necessary to use a sway control device with sufficient capacity. If the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 296
2-5. Driving information Removing hitch cover STEP 1 Remove the clip. STEP 2 Grasp the lower edge of the hitch cover and raise the cover. When reattaching the reverse the steps listed. cover, 298 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 297
ball Use the correct trailer ball for your application. Trailer ball load rating Matches or exceeds the gross trailer weight rating of the trailer. Ball diameter Matches the size of the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size. 2 When driving Shank length - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 298
2-5. Driving information Connecting and disconnecting a trailer Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following: l Connecting a trailer STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 selected. However, there is no problem to continue normal driving. Drive with sufficient care because of large load. 300 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 299
2-5. Driving information l Disconnecting a trailer STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 7 STEP the height select switch.) Turn off the "ENGINE START STOP" switch or the 4-Wheel AHC. Set the supporting leg of a trailer on the ground and raise the hitch by 4 in. (100 mm). Turn on the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 300
Driving information Trailer towing tips Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. The 3 main causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading. Keep the following in mind when towing. l Before starting out, check the trailer lights - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 301
information l Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a larger than normal turning radius. l Crosswinds and rough roads the length of use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 302
2-5. Driving information l Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailer wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in "P". Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following: Apply the brakes and keep them - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 303
purposes. n Break-in schedule Lexus recommends that you do not use a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new power train components (engine, transmission due to the additional load. (See "Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance".) l Retighten the fixing bolts of - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 304
assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load capacities. l Never load more weight in the back than in the front of the trailer. About 60% of the load should be in the front half of the trailer, and the remaining 40% in the rear. l Do not use cruise control when - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 305
information CAUTION n Hitches l Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease. l If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, keep your vehicle level with the ground. n When towing a trailer l If the gross trailer weight exceeds 1000 lb. (453 kg), trailer brakes are required. Lexus - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 306
2-5. Driving information Dinghy towing Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home. NOTICE n To avoid serious damage to your vehicle Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground. 308 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 307
2-5. Driving information 2 When driving 309 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 308
can control the audio system and air conditioning system, and adjust the screen display etc. Press to display the "Information" screen. Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the "Navigation System Owner's Manual". With navigation system Without navigation system 312 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 309
Assist" "Language" "Screen Setting" "Beep Off" "Adjust Clock" P. 322 P. 340 P. 312 P. 316 Page Navigation System Owner's Manual P. 461/ Navigation System Owner's Manual Navigation System Owner's Manual P. 225 P. 315 P. 319 P. 316 P. 518/ Navigation System Owner's Manual 3 Interior features 313 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 310
3-1. Using the touch screen The initial screen If the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the initial screen will be displayed for a few seconds as the system starts up. n To avoid damaging the touch screen l Touch the screen lightly with your finger. If there is - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 311
your desired settings. Language settings (with navigation system) The language used for all voice guidance, messages and touch screen switches may be changed. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Press Touch . on the "Information" screen. Select the desired language. 3 Interior features STEP 4 Touch . 315 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 312
a touch screen switch is touched can be turned off. STEP 1 STEP 2 Press . Touch . Adjusting the display STEP 1 STEP 2 Press . / and / . Adjust the display as desired using If you do not touch the screen for 20 seconds, the system will return to the previous screen. With CD mode 316 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 313
3-1. Using the touch screen With DVD mode "Color" Red Green 3 "Tone" "Contrast" "Brightness" Lighter Weaker Darker Darker Stronger Brighter Interior features 317 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 314
in "Day Mode" when the headlights are turned on until touched again. "MAX", "Day Mode" is not displayed. n To turn off the picture display is If the instrument panel light control is set to If is touched, the screen display is turned off, and guidance is by voice only. Touching play. opens or - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 315
conditioning or audio system use, the system will return the display to the previous screen. Switch color You can select the switch color. Rear system lock (if equipped) The operation lock on the rear seat entertainment system can be turned on or off. 3 Interior features Personal data deletion - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 316
Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. or . . on the "Information" screen. or . . on the "Information" screen. or . on the "Screen Setting" screen. on the "Screen Setting" screen. on the "Screen Setting" screen. n Setting the switch color STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 n Setting the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 317
3-1. Using the touch screen n To delete personal data STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Press Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Screen Setting" screen. Touch . Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted. 3 Interior features n When deleting personal data - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 318
button Air conditioning on/off switch Airflow display Fan speed display Driver's side temperature control Automatic mode Driver's side temperature display Off * Windshield defogger Passenger's side temperature control Outside air or recirculated air mode Passenger's side temperature display Rear - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 319
. (→ "Navigation System Owner's Manual") A B Without dynamic radar cruise control With dynamic radar cruise control 3 Using the automatic mode STEP 1 Interior features Press . to decrease the temperature. The temperature for the driver's and front passenger's seats can be set separately. 323 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 320
and rear seats (→P. 335) can be adjusted separately. Operating the passenger's side temperature control will enter individual mode. Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is off.): Only or (driver's side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats. n Adjusting the fan speed Touch any switch - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 321
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger n Changing the air outlets upper body. *1: Depending on the rear air conditioning setting. 3 *2: Only in the automatic mode Interior features Air flows to the upper body andfeet. *1: Depending on the rear air conditioning setting. Air flows - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 322
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates. n and (introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the button is pressed. When the air intake control system is switched to automatic mode, it operates automatically. 326 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 323
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Changing the rear seat settings rear seat The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is touched. 3 Interior features n Adjusting the fan speed STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch on the screen or press . (decrease - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 324
The air conditioning system control operates automatically. Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air mode. Micro dust and pollen filter Press . Outside air mode switches to (recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 325
and defogger Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode STEP 1 STEP 2 While the vehicle is stopped, press and hold "Smog Sensor" screen appears. Touch any until the switch of (lower sensitivity ↔ higher sensitivity) on the operation screen. 3 Interior features 329 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 326
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets Front center outlets Direct air flow to the left - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 327
mode is used for an extended period. n Window defogger feature Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to ations where the windows need to be defogged. n Automatic mode for air intake control (outside air) mode in situ3 Interior features In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 328
the air conditioning system and defogger CAUTION n To prevent the windshield from fogging up Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 329
40°C) up to 122°F (50°C). 3 Interior features n The outside temperature is displayed when The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode. n When "- -" or "E" is displayed The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer n Display In the following situations, the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 330
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Rear air conditioning system Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. Fan speed display Left side temperature setting display Left side temperature control Airflow display Right side temperature - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 331
the air conditioning system and defogger Using the automatic mode STEP 1 Press . The air can be set separately. 3 STEP 2 to increase the temperature and ∨ to decrease Interior features Adjusting the settings n Adjusting the temperature setting Press ∧ on temperature. The temperature for - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 332
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Air flows to the upper body. Air flows to the upper body and feet. Air flows to the feet. 336 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 333
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Adjusting the position and opening . Turn the knob fully to the back of the vehicle to close the vent. 3 Interior features NOTICE n To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 334
the air conditioning system and defogger Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors. On/off The defoggers will automatically turn - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 335
Windshield wiper de-icer This feature is used to prevent ice from building Interior features n The windshield wiper de-icer can be operated when The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode. CAUTION n When the windshield wiper de-icer is on Do not touch the glass at the lower part - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 336
3-3. Using the audio system Audio system type CD and (optional) DVD player with changer and AM/FM radio Press to display the audio operation screen. This illustration is a vehicle equipped with the DVD player. 340 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 337
380 3 P. 390 Interior features P. 395 P. 400 P. 404 P. 411 P. 415 P. 416 Using the speech command system (with navigation system) Press or to operate the speech command system. (→"Navigation System Owner's Manual") A B Without dynamic radar cruise control With dynamic radar cruise control 341 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 338
any changes by yourself. This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages. • This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 339
the audio system Using the radio Press or to choose either an AM or FM band. Audio control screen display button Preset stations Scanning for receivable stations 3 Interior features Power Volume Adjusting the frequency Seeking the frequency AM•SAT/FM mode buttons Preset tuning Scanning - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 340
the audio system Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) STEP 1 Search for desired stations by turning ∧ or ∨ on . or pressing STEP 2 Touch and hold one of the preset stations (1 - 6) until you hear a beep. Scanning radio stations ( - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 341
3-3. Using the audio system n Scanning all radio stations within range AM station STEP is reached, press once again. 3 Interior features RDS (Radio Data System) This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 342
3-3. Using the audio system The type of program changes each time the button is pressed. l "ROCK" l "EASYLIS" (Easy listening) l "CLS/JAZZ" (Classical music and Jazz) l "R & B" (Rhythm and Blues) l "INFORM" (Information) l "RELIGION" l "MISC" (Miscellaneous) l "ALARM" (Emergency messages) If the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 343
any station broadcasting traffic program information. If no traffic program station is found, "NOTHING" appears on the display. XM® Satellite Radio (with navigation system) n Receiving XM® Satellite Radio STEP 1 3 Press until appears on the screen. "SAT" Interior features The display changes as - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 344
3-3. Using the audio system n Changing the channel category Touch or on the screen. n Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels l Scanning channels in the current category STEP 1 Touch - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 345
subscriptions 3 Interior features For detailed information about XM using the ID number will appear. l Satellite tuner dial, and the receiver's 8-character The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio. *: Terms and services - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 346
in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer. You have not subscribed to XM® Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose "CH000" and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 347
(Canada). n Certifications for the radio tuner This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 an outlet on a circuit different from that to which 3 Interior features the receiver is connected. l Consulting the dealer or an - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 348
the audio system Using the CD/DVD player Insert a disc or press with a disc inserted. Audio control screen display button Disc selection Disc eject Power Volume Disc slot Disc load File selection Track, file and chapter Disc change selection/fast forward/rewind - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 349
disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically. 3 Interior features n DVD hint screen (with DVD player) This screen appears when a DVD video, DVD audio or video CD is first selected with the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Touch once you have read the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 350
3-3. Using the audio system Ejecting discs n Ejecting a disc STEP 1 To select the disc to be ejected, touch the and remove the discs. n Ejecting all discs Press and hold Selecting a disc n To select a disc to play Without DVD player Touch the desired disc on the screen or press ∧ or ∨ on . With - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 351
Displays REC/REC FAST* (→P. 396, P. 397) Audio control screen display button Disc eject Power Volume Search playback Random playback Repeat play Disc slot Disc load 3 Interior features Disc change Playback Track selection *: DVD player only This illustration is a vehicle equipped with the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 352
audio system Loading and ejecting discs →P. 353 Selecting, fast forwarding and scanning tracks n Selecting a track Press ∧ to move up and ∨ to move down using track number appears on the screen. To fast forward or rewind, press and hold ∧ or ∨ on . until the desired n Selecting a track from the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 353
3-3. Using the audio system Selecting a disc n Selecting a disc to play →P. 354 n Scanning loaded . Random playback n Current disc Touch on the screen. Songs are played in random order. 3 Interior features n All discs Touch and hold on the screen until "D⋅RAND" appears. Tracks on all loaded - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 354
3-3. Using the audio system n Canceling random, repeat and scan playback Touch , or on the screen once again. n Displaying the title and artist name If a CD-TEXT - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 355
with a disc inserted. Audio control screen display button Displays folder list Disc selection Folder selection Search playback Repeat play Disc eject Power Volume Random playback Disc slot Disc load File selection Disc change 3 Interior features File selection Playback This illustration is - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 356
3-3. Using the audio system Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs →P. 353 Selecting MP3 and WMA discs →P. 354 Selecting a folder n Selecting a folder Touch "FOLDER previous folder. " - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 357
3-3. Using the audio system Selecting and scanning files n Selecting one file at a time Turn or press ∧ or ∨ on to select the desired file. n Selecting a file from the file list STEP 1 Touch on the screen to turn the folder list on. Touch on the folder list STEP 2 screen. 3 Interior features - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 358
3-3. Using the audio system Repeat play n Repeating a file Touch on the screen. n Repeating all of the files in a folder Touch and hold on the screen until " - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 359
some discs may not be played from the main story. Insert a disc or press Audio/video control screen display button Disc selection Return to video screen with a disc inserted. 3 Interior features Change screen mode (→P. 394) Disc eject Power Volume Disc slot Disc load Track and chapter selection - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 360
3-3. Using the audio system n Control icon screen Touch any part of the screen if no icons are shown while watching a video, and the following screen appears. DVD video mode Return to top menu screen Menu control key Hide control icons Go to page 2 Page 1 Return to menu screen Stop Rewind Fast - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 361
audio mode Return to top menu screen Menu control key Hide control icons Go to page 2 Page 1 Change the audio format Rewind Stop Fast forward Playback Pause Initial DVD setup Select menu number Return to page 1 3 Interior features Page 2 Search for desired screen Return to registered screen - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 362
you hear a beep. Slow playback Touch are touching and then touch . . Video is played slowly while you Searching for a desired screen n Searching by title (DVD video mode) STEP 1 Touch on the control icon screen. Input the desired title number and STEP 2 then touch . : deletes the last input number - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 363
a bonus group (DVD audio mode only, if the DVD has bonus options) STEP 1 Touch on the control icon screen. Input the desired bonus group STEP 2 number on the group search screen and touch : deletes the number : returns to the previous screen 3 Interior features . n Searching by chapter/track - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 364
on STEP 2 the screen and touch . Using the DVD menu STEP 1 Touch or on the control icon screen. STEP 2 Touch if the menu control key does not appear on the menu screen. differs from one DVD to another. Refer to the manual that comes with the DVD disc. (The above image is an example.) 368 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 365
next available language is selected. : hides the subtitles : returns to the previous screen Changing the audio language (DVD video only) Touch screen. on the control icon 3 Interior features Each time you touch the switch, the next available language is selected. : returns to the previous screen - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 366
3-3. Using the audio system Changing the angle (if the angle option is available) STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch on the control icon screen. Touch . Each time you touch the switch, the next available angle is selected. : returns to the previous screen Initial DVD setup n Displaying "Setup Menu" screen - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 367
3-3. Using the audio system n Setting audio language STEP 1 Touch on the "Setup Menu" language code. (→P. 373) : returns to the previous screen and input the Interior features n Setting angle mark "ON" or "OFF" If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on or off. Touch on the " - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 368
3-3. Using the audio system n Parental lock STEP 1 Touch STEP 2 on the "Setup Menu" code If you touch on the "Select Audio Language" screen, "Select Subtitle Language" screen or "Select DVD Language" screen, you can select a language by entering the 4-digit language code if that language is - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 369
3-3. Using the audio system l Language codes Code 0514 0618 0405 0920 0519 2608 1412 1620 1922 Armenian Interlingua Interlingue Inupiak Indonesian Icelandic Hebrew Japanese Yiddish Javanese Georgian Kazakh Greenlandic Cambodian Kannada 3 Interior features Byelorussian 0704 Scots-Gaelic 1114 373 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 370
3-3. Using the audio system Code 1119 1121 1125 1201 1214 1215 1220 1222 1307 1309 Malay Maltese Burmese Nauru Nepali 1823 1901 1904 1907 1908 1909 1911 1912 1913 Kinyarwanda 2008 Sanskrit Sindhi Sangho SerboCroatian Sinhalese Slovak Slovenian Samoan 2009 2011 2012 2014 2015 2018 2019 2020 374 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 371
Volapük Wolof Xhosa Code 2515 2621 Language Yoruba Zulu n Error messages If "Region Code Error" is displayed, check if the region code printed on the DVD matches the player's region code. If a different message is displayed: →P. 380 3 Interior features 375 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 372
3-3. Using the audio system Playing a video CD (with DVD player) For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the vehicle is completely stopped with the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode and the parking brake applied. While you are driving, only - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 373
Touch any part of the screen if no icons are shown while watching a video CD, and the following screen appears. Search for a track Page 1 Hide control icons Go to page 2 Return to registered screen Show previous screen Change sound-multiplex Show next screen 3 Interior features Page 2 Return - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 374
Slow playback Touch and then touch on the control icon screen. Video is . or on the control icon screen or press and until you hear a beep. played slowly while you are touching Using the video CD menu Touch on the control icon screen. Refer to the manual that comes with the video CD for specific - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 375
desired screen appears. n Searching by number STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch on the control icon screen. Input the desired track number on the screen and touch . : deletes the last input number : hides icons. To display icons, touch . : returns to the previous screen 3 Interior features Changing the sound - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 376
3-3. Using the audio system CD/DVD player and DVD video disc information n Error messages Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer. Message No CD or No disc Cause Correction Procedures There is no disc in - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 377
disc does not have a region code, you may not be able to use it. l The DVD player supports multi-channel sound is output. 3 n Symbols shown on DVD video discs Interior features Symbol Meaning Indicates NTSC format Indicates the number of audio tracks Indicates the number of language subtitles - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 378
when a problem is detected while. n If discs are left inside the CD/DVD player or in the ejected position for extended periods Discs may be damaged and may not play properly. n Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD/DVD player. n DVD video disc information l DVD video - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 379
the disc on the DVD player. (→P. 381) l Audio Interior features This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format DVDs. Other decoded types cannot be played. l Title and chapter Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by title and chapter - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 380
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 381
Using 256, 320 (kbps) l Compatible media Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs. Playback l Compatible disc formats 3 The following disc formats can be used: • Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 CD (including the root) Maximum length of folder names/file names: - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 382
ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it be played. l Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they may be mistakenly recognized - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 383
3-3. Using the audio system l Playback • To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. 3 Interior features CAUTION n DVD video precaution Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 384
the audio system NOTICE n Discs and adapters that cannot be used Do not use the following types of discs, 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters or Dual Disc. Doing so may damage the player and/or disc insert/eject function. l Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm) l - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 385
3-3. Using the audio system NOTICE n Player precautions Failure to follow the precautions below may result in apply oil to the player. l Store discs away from direct sunlight. l Never try to disassemble any part of the player. l Do not insert more than one disc at a time. 3 Interior features 389 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 386
audio system Optimal use of the audio/video system Press to display the audio/video control screen. Operating the radio and audio CD Adjust sound quality and balance Adjust the DSP (Digital Signal Processing) Operating the DVD video/audio and video CD Adjust sound quality and balance Adjust - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 387
3-3. Using the audio system Adjusting sound quality and balance STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch on the screen. right volume balance Display Level -5 to 5 -5 to 5 -5 to 5 F7 to R7 L7 to R7 Touch 3 Interior features or or or *: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio, CD or - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 388
3-3. Using the audio system Setting DSP (Digital Signal Processing) The following features can be set as desired by touching screen: Without DVD player on the With DVD player n Turning Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) "ON" or "OFF" Touch or . ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 389
3-3. Using the audio system n Changing the listening position (without DVD player) The speaker balance can be best suited to the driver's seat 3 Position best suited to the driver's and front passenger's seat Position best suited to the rear seats Interior features Position best suited to all - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 390
3-3. Using the audio system Setting the screen ratio mode (with DVD player) STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch on the screen. Touch one of , or to match the screen ratio printed on the DVD. Screen ratio mode "NORMAL" "WIDE1" "WIDE2" Details Suitable for 4:3 screen ratio Expands the normal screen horizontally - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 391
on the HDD. (→P. 411) Record setting STEP 1 Touch audio disc. when playing an 3 Interior features STEP 2 Touch the desired button. "Auto REC" The automatic record setting can be set to (AUTO) or (MANUAL). "REC Quality" The sound quality used for recording can be set. STEP 3 Touch . 395 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 392
3-3. Using the audio system Recording automatically If "Auto REC" is set to on the "REC Settings" screen, recording starts simultaneously with the playback of an audio - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 393
3-3. Using the audio system Recording manually If "Auto REC" is set to tracks will be recorded. on the "REC Settings" the desired track again cancels selection of the track. : select all the tracks. : cancel all the selections. Interior features STEP 3 Touch . n Cancel recording Touch . 397 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 394
l The audio disc being recorded is ejected, or another disc is selected using the DVD player. l "Auto REC" is switched from l to on the "REC Settings" screen. , or is operated, fast forwarding or rewinding is performed, or the track is changed during automatic normal speed recording. l The file - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 395
Using the audio system n The playback sound source will change from the HDD to the audio disc and the playback will pause for about 1 to 2 seconds when l Fast recording is completed. l l is touched during manual contains 44.1 kHz, 16-bit-stereo PCM digital audio data. 3 Interior features 399 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 396
recorded to the sound library (with DVD player) Press the button when tracks are recorded in the HDD. Album, artist, genre list selection Displays album, artist, genre list Repeat play Audio control screen display button Power Volume Search playback Random playback Playback Track selection Album - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 397
3-3. Using the audio system Selecting the desired mode STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch . Touch the desired mode. Selecting a desired album/artist/genre list n Selecting a desired album Press ∧ or ∨ on or touch "ALBUM " or " " to select 3 Interior features the next/previous album. n Selecting a desired - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 398
the audio system n Searching for a desired album STEP 1 Touch and hold or press and hold the "PM.SCAN" appears. The first 10 seconds of the first track on the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 399
and hold until the "PM.RAND" appears. n Playing the tracks from the album in random order Touch . n About the recorded sound 3 Interior features 403 The data is recorded using a highly efficient compression method, so sound may slightly differ from the original depending on the sound source. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 400
3-3. Using the audio system Editing data recorded to the sound library (with DVD player) Recorded albums and tracks can be deleted, and track information can be edited or retrieved from the database (CDDB). The data cannot be edited while driving. STEP 1 Play the desired album, and touch on the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 401
3-3. Using the audio system Changing the name of an album STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch . Touch . STEP 3 Input the name and touch , : Letter input : Number/Symbol input : Space : Backspace . 3 Interior features 405 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 402
3-3. Using the audio system Changing track information STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch . Touch . STEP 3 Touch the desired track. STEP 4 Touch edited. for the item to be 406 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 403
3-3. Using the audio system n Changing a track title Enter the name and touch , : Letter input : Space : Backspace : Number/Symbol input . n Changing an artist name STEP 1 Touch . or 3 Interior features l Select From List STEP 2 If you touched , touch the desired artist name from the list. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 404
3-3. Using the audio system l Manual Input STEP 2 If you touched , input the artist name and touch . , : Letter input : Space : Backspace : Number/Symbol input STEP 3 Touch . Touch the desired genre. n Changing the genre STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch . 408 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 405
3-3. Using the audio system : Deleting albums STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch . Select a desired the albums. : cancel all the selections. STEP 3 Touch . 3 Deleting tracks STEP 1 STEP 2 Interior features Touch . Touch . STEP 3 Select a desired track from the list and touch . Touching the desired - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 406
that was provided when a track was recorded is not correct, you can search for track information from the database stored in the HDD and edit the information. STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch . Touch . STEP 3 To stop the search, touch . If there are multiple album titles, a list screen will be displayed - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 407
by the Gracenote 3 Interior features CDDB music recognition service. l To check the database version number, see "To confirm the map data and CDDB versions and map coverage area". (→"Navigation System Owner's Manual") l For details about updating the CDDB, contact your Lexus dealer. 411 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 408
owner's permission. The data is for personal use only. l Lexus does not compensate for contents that cannot be recorded or any loss of recorded data due to a malfunction or failure of the navigation system. l The data saved or recorded onto this navigation pending. Some services supplied under - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 409
this application to do online disc identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online services ("Gracenote Servers") and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 410
Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its online services at any time. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 411
the vehicle's speakers. STEP 1 Connect the portable audio device. STEP 2 Press . 3 Interior features n Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 412
steering wheel audio switches Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel. Turns the power on, selects audio source Volume STE Radio mode: Selects radio stations CD mode: Selects tracks, files (MP3 and WMA) and discs DVD mode*: Selects tracks, chapters and discs - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 413
3-3. Using the audio system Changing the audio source Press when the audio SAT (1,2,3)→FM (1,2) With DVD player: FM (1,2)→Sound library→DVD changer→AUX→AM→ SAT (1,2,3)→FM (1,2) Adjusting the volume Press to increase the volume and to decrease the volume. 3 Interior features Hold up the switch - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 414
select the desired track/file or chapter. Selecting a disc or folder in the CD or DVD player (Folder selection is available only when MP3/WMA disc is in use.) STEP 1 STEP 2 Press to select the CD or DVD player. or until a beep is heard. Press and hold Selecting a track (Sound library mode only - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 415
3-3. Using the audio system n Canceling automatic selection of a radio station Press the same switch. CAUTION n To reduce the risk of an accident Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel. 3 Interior features 419 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 416
system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the front audio system. Front audio system Display Rear seat entertainment system controller Headphone volume control knobs and headphone jacks A/V input adapter Power outlet Power outlet main switch 420 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 417
system controller To use the buttons under the cover, slide the cover down. Opening and closing the display 3 n Opening and closing the display With navigation system l Open Press or , . , , Interior features l Close Press or . If the display is closed with an image shown, the image will - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 418
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system Without navigation system l Open Press . , , or l Close Press or . If the display is closed with an image shown, the image will automatically turn off. (The sound will not be turned off.) Opening and closing operations can be performed from the front - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 419
a few seconds when the rear display is opened. During this time, only can be operated. Headphone jacks To listen to the rear audio, use headphones. To use the headphones Connect them to the jack. To adjust the volume Turn the knob clockwise to increase the volume. Turn the knob counterclockwise to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 420
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system Changing the source Press to display the audio source selection screen. Select an audio source. Changing the speaker output To play the rear audio over the speakers in the vehicle, turn on. 424 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 421
can be used when The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or using the controller (for new vehicle owners) An insulating sheet is set to prevent the batteries from being depleted. Remove the insulating sheet before using the remote control. 3 Interior features n When the controller - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 422
n When the remote controller is not used Stow the remote controller. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. n Closing the display Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. n For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada l Laser - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 423
or place heavy objects on the remote control. n DVD player Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the slot. n Closing the display 3 Interior features Do not close the display using your hand. Doing so may result in a malfunction - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 424
the rear seat entertainment system Using the radio Select radio mode on the source screen to display the control screen. Selecting a preset station Press ∧ or ∨ on screen. Tuning the station until the desired station band appears on the Press ∧ or ∨ on until the desired - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 425
the rear seat entertainment system Using the DVD player Turning on DVD player mode Selecting a disc Selecting a disc 3 Press ∧ or ∨ on until the Interior features desired slot number appears on the screen. l Audio CD, CD text →P. 430 l MP3/WMA disc →P. 431 l DVD video/audio →P. 433 l Video CD - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 426
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system Playing an audio CD/CD text n Selecting a track Press ∧ or ∨ on until the desired track number appears on the screen. n Fast forwarding or rewinding a track Press and hold ∧ or ∨ on . 430 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 427
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system Playing WMA/MP3 discs n Selecting a file Press ∧ or ∨ on until the desired file number appears on ∧ or ∨ on appears on the screen. n Fast forwarding or rewinding a file Press and hold ∧ or ∨ on . until the desired folder number 3 Interior features 431 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 428
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system Playing the HDD audio (with navigation system) Select "HDD" on the source screen to display the control screen. Selecting a track Press ∧ or ∨ on screen. Selecting a list Press ∧ or ∨ on on the screen. until the desired track number appears until the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 429
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system Playing DVD video/audio n Controller Turning on the DVD mode Selecting a chapter/track Rewinding a disc Turning on the title selection screen Changing the subtitle language Turning on the control icon screen Changing the audio language Stopping a disc - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 430
video, and the following screen appears. DVD video mode Return to top menu screen Page 1 Hide control icons Go to page 2 Return to menu screen Stop Rewind Fast forward Playback Pause Page 2 Initial DVD setup Return to page 1 Change angle Search for desired screen Return to menu screen Change - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 431
audio mode Return to top menu screen Page 1 Hide control icons Go to page 2 Change the audio format Rewind Stop Fast forward Playback Pause Initial DVD setup Select menu number Return to page 1 3 Interior features Page 2 Search for desired screen Return to registered screen Return to previous - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 432
Using the rear seat entertainment system Turning on or off the control icons Press Press to turn on the control icons. once again or select to turn off the control the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc. Fast forwarding/rewinding a disc Perform either of the following: l Select - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 433
the separate manual for the DVD disc. Searching for a desired screen n Searching by title (DVD video mode) STEP 1 Select on the control icon screen. returns to the previous screen Interior features n Searching by group (DVD audio mode) STEP 1 STEP 2 Select on the control icon screen. Input the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 434
system n Playing a bonus group (DVD audio mode only, if the DVD has bonus options) STEP 1 Select on the control icon screen. Input the desired bonus group STEP 2 number on the group search screen and select . : deletes the number : returns to the previous screen n Searching by chapter/track Press - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 435
you press , the next available language is selected. : hides the control icons : returns to the previous screen Changing the audio language (DVD video only) STEP 1 STEP 2 3 Interior features Press or select on the control icon screen. Select . Each time you press , the next available language - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 436
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system Changing the audio format (DVD audio only) STEP 1 STEP 2 Press or select on the control icon screen. Select . Each time you press , the next available audio format is selected. : returns to the previous screen Changing the angle (If the angle option - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 437
DVD setup n Displaying "Setup Menu" screen STEP 1 Select on the control icon screen. After you change the initial setSTEP 2 tings, select . : restores default settings n Setting audio language STEP 1 Select STEP 2 Select the desired language. 3 on the "Setup Menu" screen. and Interior features - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 438
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system n Setting angle mark "ON" or "OFF" If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on on the "Select Audio Language" screen, "Select Subtitle Language" screen or "DVD Language" screen, you can select a language by entering the 4-digit language - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 439
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system l Language codes Code 0514 0618 0405 0920 0519 2608 Interlingua Interlingue Inupiak Indonesian Icelandic Hebrew Japanese Yiddish Javanese Georgian Kazakh Greenlandic Cambodian Kannada 3 Interior features Byelorussian 0704 Scots-Gaelic 1114 443 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 440
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system Code 1119 1121 1125 1201 1214 1215 1220 1222 Maltese Burmese Nauru Nepali 1823 1901 1904 1907 1908 1909 1911 1912 1913 Kinyarwanda 2008 Sanskrit Sindhi Sangho SerboCroatian Sinhalese Slovak Slovenian Samoan 2009 2011 2012 2014 2015 2018 2019 2020 444 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 441
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system Code 2023 2111 2118 2126 Language Twi Ukrainian Urdu messages If "Region Code Error" is displayed, check if the region code printed on the DVD matches the player's region code. If a different message is displayed: →P. 380 3 Interior features 445 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 442
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system Playing a video CD n Controller Selecting a track Rewinding a disc Turning on the control icon screen Stopping a disc Fast forwarding a disc Playing/pausing a disc Selecting an icon Inputting the selected icon 446 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 443
a video CD, and the following screen appears. Select menu number Page 1 Hide control icons Go to page 2 Return to registered screen Show previous screen Change sound-multiplex Show next screen 3 Interior features Page 2 Return to page 1 Pause Rewind Playback Fast forward If appears on the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 444
the video CD Perform either of the following: l Select or on the screen by pressing and holding . l Press and hold ∧ or ∨ on Slow playback Select select and then select . . Video is played slowly when you . by pressing and holding Using the video CD menu Select . Refer to the manual that comes - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 445
entertainment system Selecting a desired screen n Selecting a menu number STEP 1 Select on the control icon screen. Input the desired menu number on STEP 2 the screen and select . 3 n Searching manually Interior features Select or on the screen, or press ∧ or ∨ on until the desired screen - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 446
the rear seat entertainment system DVD player and DVD video disc information n Error messages →P. 380 n DVD video discs →P. 381 n Symbols shown on DVD video discs →P. 381 n Discs that can be used →P. 382 n DVD video disc information →P. 382 n Sound →P. 384 n MP3 and WMA files →P. 384 450 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 447
the rear seat entertainment system CAUTION n DVD video precaution →P. 387 NOTICE n Discs and adapters that cannot be used →P. 388 n Player precautions Failure to follow the precautions discs away from direct sunlight. l Never try to disassemble any part of the player. 3 Interior features 451 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 448
the video Before switching to the video mode, connect the audio-video equipment to the A/V input adapter. Using the adapter Open the cover. The A/V input adapter is composed of 3 input adapters. Yellow: Image input adapter White: Left channel audio input adapter Red: Right channel audio input - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 449
to the A/V input adapter. 3 Interior features n A/V input adapter The rear seat entertainment system plays videos and sound when audio-video equipment is connected to the A/V input adapter. For details, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. n Power outlet The power outlet is used to connect - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 450
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system Changing other settings Setting the display mode Pressing changes the display modes sequentially as follows: Normal→Wide 1 →Wide 2 Adjusting the screen Press . Select the brightness, contrast, tone or color, and make adjustments. Press or to input it. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 451
when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to OFF mode. The display will automatically open when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Displaying the map screen (with navigation system) Press . 3 Interior features The map screen will appear. 455 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 452
of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to "Navigation System Owner's Manual". n Telephone switch Sending/Receiving/ "Telephone" screen display (when stopped) End call n Microphone The person you are speaking to can be heard from the driver's side speaker. To use the hands-free - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 453
on the "Telephone" screen. Connection status Battery charge Call area Signal strength 3 Indicators Connection status Blue: Good Yellow: Bad Conditions Interior features : Not connected Battery charge : Full : Low : Empty "Rm": Roaming area "Hm": Home area : Good : Bad : Not connected Call area - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 454
may be difficult to hear the other party: When driving on unpaved roads When driving at high speeds If a window is open If the air will not operate l If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth® l If the mobile phone is switched off l If you are outside service range l If the mobile - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 455
cannot enter the Bluetooth® phone. If your cellular phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth® phone. n Certification for the hands-free system 3 Interior features FCC ID: BABBT016A IC: 2024B-BT016A MADE IN JAPAN This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 456
and ankles). This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. n Caution while driving Do not use the mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® system. NOTICE n When leaving the vehicle Do not leave your mobile phone in the vehicle. The inside - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 457
the hands-free system (for cellular phone) Using a Bluetooth® phone Bluetooth® connection status Character deletion Display last person called Make a call 3 Interior features To display the screen shown above, press "Information" screen. , and touch on the Registering a Bluetooth® phone - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 458
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) STEP 4 Touch . STEP 5 Touch . STEP 6 Input the passkey displayed on the screen into your phone. If the message " - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 459
connection If the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system will automatically connect to the Bluetooth® phone. Touching "Auto Connect" will turn it on/off. 3 Interior features Manual connection If automatic connection fails or is turned off, connection - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 460
system (for cellular phone) Making a call Once the Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the following procedure: n Dialing STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Press Touch . on the "Information" screen. Input the phone number. To delete the inputted phone number, touch . To dial the last - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 461
may be stored in the phone book. (→P. 486) STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Press Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. Choose the desired name to call from the list. 3 Interior features STEP 5 Choose the number and then touch or press on the steering wheel. 465 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 462
or incoming calls. Up to 5 numbers are stored, with the last recent number being deleted to make room for a new number. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Press Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. Choose the number to call from the list. To choose a number from the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 463
You can make a call using numbers registered from the phone book and call history. (→P. 479) STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Press Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. Choose the desired number to make a call. To change the page, touch or . 3 Interior features 467 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 464
n Calling using voice recognition Using voice recognition, you can call by name from the "Phone Book" screen, call by number from the "Telephone" screen, and send tones from the "Call" screen. (→P. 473) Talk switch Without dynamic radar cruise control B With dynamic radar cruise control l Calling - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 465
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) l Calling by number from the " wait until a beep and then say "Dial". l Sending tones from the "Call" screen STEP 1 Interior features Press or . STEP 2 Following the system guidance, wait until a beep and then say the desired number - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 466
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) n Outgoing/incoming call history list l If you make You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile phone in use. n To display the voice recognition command list STEP 1 After pressing or , touch . If the "Operating - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 467
guide STEP 1 After pressing or , touch . If the "Command List" screen is displayed, touch . STEP 2 Touch . n To cancel voice recognition l Press and hold l Press l Touch or . 3 on the steering wheel. . (excluding command verification) n When using voice recognition Interior features Use - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 468
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) Receiving a call When a call is received call volume Touch or switches. n International calls . You can also adjust the volume using the steering Received international calls may not be displayed correctly, depending on the mobile phone in - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 469
phone The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone. n To adjust the incoming call volume Touch or . You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches. n To prevent the other party from hearing your voice Touch . 3 Interior features 473 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 470
the hands-free system (for cellular phone) n Inputting key tones When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank, you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phone book. STEP 1 STEP 2 Touch . Input the number. If repeated tone symbols* are - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 471
may vary according to the mobile phone used. l For operation of the mobile phone in use, see the phone's manual. n To send a tone by speed tone Touch displayed. and touch . Choose the desired number from the speed tone list n While driving Key input is unavailable. 3 Interior features 475 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 472
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) Setting the hands-free system (for cellular phone) You can speed dial, register in and edit the phone book data, and set the Bluetooth® phone. Connection method To display the screen shown above, press "Information" screen, and touch , touch - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 473
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) Registering/Deleting a Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. on the "Settings" screen. Touch in the "Speed Dial" section of the "Speed Dial Settings" screen. 3 Interior features STEP 6 Select the data to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 474
Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) STEP 7 Select the number to be registered. STEP 8 Touch the desired switch. The last dialed number will be registered in position 6. n Deleting a speed dial item STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 475
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) n To delete all speed dial items. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press Touch Touch Touch . 3 on the "Information" screen. Interior features on the "Telephone" screen. on the "Settings" screen. Touch Tone" section. in the "Speed STEP - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 476
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) STEP 7 Input the number and touch . STEP 8 Touch the desired switch. n Editing a speed tone STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. on the "Settings" screen. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 477
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) STEP 6 Touch the switch to be edited. STEP 7 STEP 8 Input the name and touch Input the number and touch Press Touch Touch Touch . . . 3 n Deleting a speed tone STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Interior features on the "Information" - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 478
. on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. on the "Settings" screen. Touch or the volume. to lower or raise Voice volume: changes the speaker volume Ring volume: changes the ring volume Voice tag volume: changes the voice tag volume n Adaptive volume control When traveling at 50 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 479
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) Changing the screen settings The following settings can be changed: l "Incoming Call set the system to show the status confirmation display when connecting. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc. 3 Interior features 483 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 480
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) n "Incoming Call Display" settings STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. on the "Settings" screen. : The hands-free screen is displayed when a call is received, and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 481
Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) n "Show Bluetooth* connection status at startup" settings STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information" Bluetooth SIG. Inc. n To set the screen settings to default Interior features Touch , and then . 485 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 482
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) Phone book settings Up to 1000 names, 2 items per name, can be registered. n Transferring mobile phone data STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. on the "Settings" - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 483
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) STEP 7 To overwrite . data, beginning. n Registering by input STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Interior features Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. on the "Settings" screen. Touch section. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 484
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) STEP 6 Choose the switch to register. :Input the name on the "Name" screen. and : Input the number(s) on - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 485
2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Press Touch . on the "Information" screen. Touch on the "Telephone" screen. Choose the desired number from the list. To choose from the incoming call history, touch desired number. and select the STEP 5 Touch . 3 Interior features STEP 6 STEP 7 Choose the phone book entry to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 486
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) n Editing phone book data STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. on the "Settings" screen. STEP 6 STEP 7 STEP 8 Touch in the "Phone Book" section of the "Phone - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 487
edit registered data, and delete items. STEP 1 Press STEP 2 Touch STEP 3 Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. on the "Phone Book" screen. 3 STEP 4 To register data, touch Interior features To delete all data, touch . To delete or edit specific data, select the data to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 488
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) Changing the phone book group name settings n Registering a group name STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. on the "Settings" screen. STEP 6 STEP 7 Touch in the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 489
"Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. on the "Settings" screen. STEP 6 STEP 7 Touch in the "Group Name" section of the "Phone Book Management" screen. Select the group name to delete, and a confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch . 3 Interior features - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 490
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) Deleting the history STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Press Touch . on the "Information" screen. Touch on the "Telephone" screen. Select the data to delete from the list. To delete data from the incoming call history, touch the data - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 491
security settings You can disable certain hands-free system functions. Use the security settings when you do not wish other people use. n Changing the security code STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. Interior features - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 492
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) Input the new security code, and touch message will appear. STEP 8 If everything is correct, touch . n Enabling security STEP 7 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 . A confirmation Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 493
Using information screen l Changing the security code 3 The speed dial screen is not displayed while driving. Interior features n When changing the security code l Be sure to choose a number difficult for strangers to guess. l Do not forget the security code. Even your Lexus - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 494
If multiple Bluetooth® phones are registered, follow the procedure below to select the Bluetooth® phone to be used. You may only use one phone at a time. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Press Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. Touch . STEP 5 Select the phone to be - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 495
Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) n Displaying Bluetooth® information You can check the device address and device name. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press Touch Touch . on the "Information screen (max. 20 characters). 3 Interior features n To change the Bluetooth® settings - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 496
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) STEP 5 To change the device ® settings to default STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information" screen. on the "Telephone" screen. on the "Settings" screen. STEP 6 Touch on the "Bluetooth* Settings" - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 497
Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone) n To delete the Bluetooth® settings STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press Touch Touch Touch . on the "Information displayed. If everything is correct, touch . Interior features *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc. 501 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 498
3-6. Using the interior lights Interior lights list Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of the electronic - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 499
3-6. Using the interior lights Interior lights "ENGINE START STOP" switch lighting Footwell lighting Luggage compartment light (→P. 505) Outer foot lights Running board lights Interior lights Front "OFF" Door position on/off "ON" 3 Interior features Rear Door position On 503 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 500
3-6. Using the interior lights Personal lights Personal lights Front On/off Rear (without rear seat entertainment system) On/off Rear (with rear seat entertainment system) On/off 504 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 501
door is not fully closed and the interior light switch is in the "DOOR" position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes. n Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Interior features Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 502
3-7. Using the storage features List of storage features Auxiliary boxes Overhead console Glove box Bottle holders Door pockets Console box/cool box Cup holders 506 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 503
3-7. Using the storage features Glove box Glove box Open (push button) Lock with the mechanical key Unlock with the mechanical key n Glove box light 3 The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on. Interior features CAUTION n While driving Keep the glove box closed. Injuries may - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 504
3-7. Using the storage features Console box Console box (if equipped) Your vehicle is equipped with either a console box or cool box. For vehicles with the cool box, refer to P. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 505
the storage features Overhead console Overhead console Press the button. The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing small items. CAUTION n Items that should not be left in the overhead console 3 Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console. If the interior of the vehicle becomes - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 506
3-7. Using the storage features Cup holders Cup holders Front Press down and release the lid. You can adjust or remove the separator inside. Rear STEP 1 Pull down the armrest. STEP 2 Press the button. 510 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 507
3-7. Using the storage features Bottle holders CAUTION n Items unsuitable for the cup holder Do not place and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns. n When not in use Keep the cup holders closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. Bottle holders - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 508
3-7. Using the storage features Bottle holders and auxiliary boxes For third seats NOTICE n Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders Put the cap on before stowing a - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 509
3-7. Using the storage features Auxiliary boxes For second seats STEP 1 Pull down the armrest. STEP 2 Press the button to release the lock. 3 Interior features For third seats CAUTION n While driving Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving. Items stored in it may fall out and cause - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 510
3-8. Other interior features Cool box (if equipped) While the engine is running, the cool box, which is cooled by the air conditioning, can be used. STEP 1 Lift the lever to open. STEP 2 On/off When on, the indicator light comes on. If the front air conditioning system is not in use, the front - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 511
3-8. Other interior features CAUTION n While driving Keep the cool box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. NOTICE n To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the cool box on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped. 3 Interior features 515 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 512
3-8. Other interior features Sun visors Main sun visor Forward position: Flip down. Side position: Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side. Side extender: Place in side position, then slide backwards. Sub-sun visor Flip down with the main sun visor in position or . 516 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 513
3-8. Other interior features Vanity mirrors Slide the cover. The light turns on when the cover is opened. 3 Interior features 517 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 514
3-8. Other interior features Clock The clock is displayed when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Perform the following procedure to adjust the clock: Without navigation system STEP 1 Press . STEP 2 STEP 3 Touch . Adjusts the hour Adjusts the minutes Rounds - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 515
3-8. Other interior features With navigation system Refer to "Navigation System Owner's Manual." n When the battery is disconnected The time display will automatically be set to 1:00. 3 Interior features 519 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 516
3-8. Other interior features Ashtrays Front Push the front part of the lid to open. Push the lid again to close. To remove, pull the ashtray upwards Rear Pull the ashtray lid to open. Pull the ashtray upwards to remove. CAUTION n When not in use Keep the ashtray closed. Injuries may result in - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 517
lighter will pop up when it is ready for use. n The cigarette lighter can be used when 3 The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Interior features CAUTION n To avoid burns or fires l Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter. l Do not hold the cigarette - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 518
3-8. Other interior features Power outlets The power outlet can be used for the following components: 12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A 115 V AC: Accessories that use less than 100 W Front (12 V) Rear (115 V AC) Main switch To use the power outlet, turn on the main switch. Power outlet - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 519
prevent the fuse from being blown 3 Interior features Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A. Do not use a 115 V AC appliance that requires the battery from being discharged Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off. n Appliances that may - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 520
3-8. Other interior features Climate control seats/seat heaters The temperature of the front seats can be adjusted individually. n Climate control seats (if equipped) Press the knob to release it, and turn the knob to the desired temperature setting. Off Press the knob to lock it when not in use. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 521
. Press the knob again to turn the system off. 3 Interior features For second seats (if equipped) For left second seat For right second sea High heating temperature Low heating temperature To turn on the seat heater, press "HI" or "LO". The indicator light on "HI" or "LO" switch indicates that the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 522
Other interior features n The Climate control seats/seat heaters can be used when The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode. n Replacing the air filters (Climate control seats only) Filters are installed in the climate control seats. For replacement of the filters, contact your Lexus - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 523
3-8. Other interior features Armrest Front Lift the lever up and slide the armrest Rear Pull the armrest down for use. 3 Interior features NOTICE n To prevent damage to the armrest Do not place too much strain on the armrest. 527 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 524
3-8. Other interior features Floor mat Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet. Secure the floor mat using the hooks provided. CAUTION n When inserting the floor mat Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 525
hooks are provided for securing loose items. n Cargo net hooks To hang the cargo net, use the cargo net hooks and rear cargo hooks. The cargo net itself is not included as an original equipment. 3 Interior features n Storage compartment (if equipped) Open the storage compartment as shown. 529 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 526
3-8. Other interior features n Warning reflector holder Hold the warning reflector with a band. equipment. CAUTION n When the cargo hooks are not in use To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in use. NOTICE n To prevent damage to the cargo net hooks - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 527
programming method below appropriate for the device. Indicator Buttons 3 Interior features n Programming HomeLink® STEP 1 Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink® buttons. Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in view while programming. 531 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 528
. If the HomeLink® indicator light comes on but does not flash, flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and remains lit, the HomeLink® button is already programmed. Use the other buttons or follow the "Reprogramming a HomeLink® button" instructions. (→P. 534) STEP 3 Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 529
Other interior features n Programming a rolling code system If your device is rolling code equipped, follow the steps under the heading " (cycle) the device's remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is completed. When the indicator light on the HomeLink® compatible transceiver - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 530
interior features STEP 5 STEP 6 Test home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance. n Reprogramming a HomeLink® button" instructions. Operating HomeLink® Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator light should come - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 531
light flashes. If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink® memory. n Before programming l Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter. l The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from 3 Interior features been tested and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 532
3-8. Other interior features CAUTION n When programming a garage door or other remote control devices The garage door on other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm. n Conforming to federal safety standards Do not use the HomeLink® - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 533
Volume control Phone button "SERVICES" button Emergency button 3 Interior features n Services The Lexus Link System offers the following services: l Airbag deployment notification (→P. 539) l Emergency assistance (→P. 539) l Stolen vehicle location assistance (→P. 540) l Remote horn/lights and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 534
interior features Safety information for the Lexus Link System Important! Read this information before using the Lexus Link System. n Exposure to radio frequency signals The Lexus were based on reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1). The design of the Lexus - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 535
3-8. Other interior features Indicator and warning lights Operation indicator light The operation indicator light will go off a short time after your subscription expired. Warning light If the warning light (red light) comes on, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. Airbag deployment - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 536
and activate horn/ lights will vary with conditions. Lexus Link is unable to remotely lock doors when the electronic key is left inside the vehicle and is unable to remotely unlock doors when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Other services Press in the vehicle - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 537
3-8. Other interior features Advanced services This service allows you to use personal calling minutes to obtain weather, traffic information and financial reports. Advisor record n Recording a conversation with an advisor Press to record a conversation. To stop recording, press again. • Up to 2 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 538
3-8. Other interior features Personal calling from OEM telematic services The Lexus Link System provides access to personal calling, a hands-free phone service provided by OEM telematic services. You can purchase a package of minutes that works best for you. As you make and receive calls, minutes - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 539
recognition. STEP 1 3 Interior features STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Press . When the system responds with "Lexus Link ready", say "Digit have problems storing a number using the continuous number method, you can store numbers one digit at a time using "Digit Store". Simply follow the instructions above - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 540
3-8. Other interior features Dialing a phone number saved as a nametag A nametag is a convenient way to store important or frequently called phone numbers for easy access at any time. To do this, choose a frequently-called number to store, the example below uses your home telephone number. l How to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 541
the last number you called by using the "Redial" feature. STEP 1 3 Press . When the system responds with "Lexus Link ready", say "Redial". with "Lexus Link ready", say "Number recall". STEP 2 The system will respond with "Connecting to number recall". STEP 1 Interior features n Receiving - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 542
interior features retrieve your phone number STEP 1 Press . When the system responds with "Lexus Link ready", say "My number". STEP 2 The system responds with "Your calling feature is not yet active; this may take a few days from vehicle delivery. It could also mean that personal calling service is - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 543
on/off". 3 n Speech recognition information Interior features The Lexus Link speech recognition systems use speech technology that is designed to Speak forcefully and clearly. • Speak calmly and naturally. • The driver should speak while facing forward, and the passenger should speak facing the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 544
interior features l Tips for one-word commands • The system recognizes only one word at a time for personal calling. (There are some exceptions, such as "Advanced services recognize your command properly, use the "Digit dial" command to enter one digit at a time. l If problems continue • Say each - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 545
interior features n Information on Advanced Services See the Lexus Link area of the Lexus website at www.lexus.com/lexuslink/ or call the Lexus Link Call Center at 1-800-255-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free) for more information. n Certification for the Lexus must be used with a distance of - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 546
3-8. Other interior features 550 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 547
washing the vehicle. l Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle's paint. n High pressure car washes l Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. l Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 548
used on the point. n Bumpers and side moldings Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. n To prevent deterioration and body corrosion l Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases: After driving near the sea coast After driving on salted roads exhaust pipe Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 549
substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights. l Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses. n When using an automatic car wash Set the wiper switch to or "OFF" It the wiper switch is in "AUTO", the wipers may - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 550
4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition: n Protecting the vehicle interior Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 551
Maintenance and care n Caring for leather areas Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior. n Shampooing the carpets There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 552
4-1. Maintenance and care NOTICE n Cleaning detergents Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces. l Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, or - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 553
, refer to the separate "Owner's Guide", "Warranty and Services Guide", "Owner's Manual Supplement" or "Warranty Booklet". n Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 554
the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. CAUTION n Warning in handling of battery, oils, fuels, and fluids l Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 555
maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the "Warranty and Services Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement". It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice. Engine compartment - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 556
4-2. Maintenance Vehicle interior Items Accelerator pedal Automatic transmission "Park" mechanism Check lock securely? Maintenance and care Brake pedal Brakes 4 Head restraints Indicators/buzzers Lights • Function properly? • Do all the lights come on? • Headlights aimed correctly? • Moves - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 557
Does the seat belt system operate smoothly? • Are the belts undamaged? • Do the seat controls operate properly? • Moves smoothly? • Has correct free play? • No strange noises? Seats Turn off the engine and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks. 562 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 558
comes on The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. n Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test: l When the battery is disconnected or - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 559
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedures given in these sections. Items Parts and tools • Warm water • Baking soda • Grease • Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) • FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 560
maintenance Items (→P. 571) Parts and tools • "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent • Rag or paper towel, funnel (used only for adding oil) • Fuse with same amperage rating as original • Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON®II or III • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding power - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 561
l Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv- ing as they or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable. just the jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports. l Use eye protection to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 562
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE n If you remove the air cleaner Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment. 4 Maintenance and care 567 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 563
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Hood Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood. STEP 1 Pull the hood release lever. The hood will pop up slightly. STEP 2 Lift the hood catch and lift the hood. CAUTION n Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 564
(→P. 581) Engine oil level dipstick (→P. 571) Engine oil filler cap (→P. 572) Brake fluid reservoir (→P. 579) Fuse box (→P. 607) Washer fluid tank (→P. 586) Battery (→P. 583) Cooling fans Condenser (→P. 578) Radiator (→P. 578) Engine coolant reservoir (→P. 577) 4 Maintenance and care 569 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 565
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine compartment cover n Removing the cover Front Right-hand side Left-hand side 570 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 566
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Installing the clips Push up center portion Insert Press Engine oil With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. n Checking the engine oil STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 567
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 Wipe the dipstick clean. Reinsert the dipstick fully. Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully. Low Full n Adding engine oil If the oil level is below or near - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 568
oil slowly, checking the dipstick. STEP 3 Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise. n Recommended viscosity SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil may be used. However, SAE 0W20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather. 4 Outside temperature Maintenance and care 573 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 569
oil containers to help you select the oil you should use. n Engine oil consumption l The amount of engine oil such as high speeds, frequent acceleration and deceleration. l A new engine consumes more oil. l When judging the amount of oil 600 miles (1000 km), contact your Lexus dealer. 574 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 570
The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures: STEP 1 Switch the display used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal. l Do not leave used - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 571
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE n To prevent serious engine damage Check the oil level on regular basis. n When replacing the engine oil l Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. l Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged. l Check the oil level on the dipstick - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 572
pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer, test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system. n Coolant selection 4 Maintenance and care Only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 573
straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION n When - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 574
Checking fluid level The brake fluid level should be between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the tank. MAX MIN Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items. n Adding fluid Fluid in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid. 579 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 575
as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem. 580 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 576
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Power steering fluid n Fluid level The fluid level should be within the appropriate range. Full (when cold) Add fluid (when cold) Full (when hot) Add fluid (when hot) Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 minutes, or slightly longer in frigid - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 577
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION n When checking the reservoir Take care, as the reservoir may be hot. NOTICE n When adding fluid Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged. n After replacing the reservoir cap Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 578
, cracks, or loose clamps. Terminals Hold-down clamp n Checking battery condition Check the battery condition using the indicator color. Blue: Good condition White: Charging is necessary. Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer. Red: Not working properly, have the battery checked by your - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 579
precautions while working on or near battery: l Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools. l Do not smoke or light a match near the battery. l Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. l Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. l Wear protective safety glasses when working - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 580
in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation. n How to recharge the battery Only perform a slow charge (5A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate. n Emergency the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off. 585 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 581
not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid. CAUTION n When refilling spilled on the engine etc. NOTICE n Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 582
treadwear indicators show. n Checking tires New tread Treadwear indicator Worn tread The location To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the warning system Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 583
transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (→P. 588, 589 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 584
not performed. based on this pressure level. STEP 3 STEP 4 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNITION ON mode. Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times and a message appears on the multi-information Lexus dealer. 589 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 585
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer. n Replacing tires and wheels If the for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious. n If the tread wears - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 586
the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 587
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. l When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warn- ing light does not flash not appear on the multi-information display. l After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 588
ID: 1551A-13BCX For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 589
parts use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus. used previously. n When initializing the tire pressure warning system Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 590
, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged transmitters Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires. n Driving on rough roads Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 591
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tire inflation pressure n Tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 698) 596 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 592
1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 Remove the tire valve cap. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge. If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust tire pressure. If you add too much air - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 593
fuel efficiency l Reduced driving comfort and tire life l Reduced safety l Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. n Instructions Always use a tire capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 594
CAUTION n Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following deformation and/or tire separation l A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards NOTICE n When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure 4 Be sure - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 595
loss of handling control. n Wheel selection When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset. Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer. Lexus does not recommend using: l Wheels of different - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 596
transmitters must be installed. (→P. 588) CAUTION n When replacing wheels l Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner's Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control. l Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 597
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Air conditioning filter The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency. n Removal method STEP 1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch IGNITION ON mode and switch to recirculated air mode, then turn the "ENGINE - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 598
2 minutes at 72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 or bar). If it is not available, have the filter cleaned by your Lexus dealer. n Replacement method Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one. The "↑UP" marks shown on the filter should be pointing up. 4 Maintenance and care 603 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 599
with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the "Warranty and Services Guide", "Owner's Manual Supplement" or "Scheduled Maintenance".) n If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically The filter may be - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 600
of the screwdriver with rag.) l Small Phillips-head screwdriver l Lithium battery (CR1632) n Replacing the battery STEP 1 Take out the mechanical key. 4 STEP 2 Remove the cover. Maintenance and care STEP 3 Remove the depleted battery. Insert a new battery with the "+" terminal facing up. 605 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 601
may occur. l The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly. l The operational range is reduced. n Use a CR1632 lithium battery l Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores. l Replace only with the same or - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 602
fuses as necessary. Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF. STEP 2 The fuses are located in the following places. To check the fuses, follow the instructions below. Engine compartment Push the tab in and lift the lid off. STEP 1 4 Maintenance and care 607 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 603
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Driver's side instrument panel Remove the bolts and the cover. Remove the lid. 608 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 604
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Passenger's side instrument panel Remove the cover. Remove the lid. 4 Maintenance and care STEP 3 STEP 4 After a system failure, see "Fuse layout and amperage ratings" (→P. 612) for details about which fuse to check. Remove the fuse with the pullout tool. 609 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 605
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 5 Check if the fuse has blown. Type A and B Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. Type A Type B 610 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 606
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Type C and D Type C Normal fuse Blown fuse Contact your Lexus dealer. Type D 4 Maintenance and care 611 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 607
25 A 30 A Circuit Exhaust system Horn Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, EFI NO.2, exhaust system Injector, ignition, meter No circuit Seat heater and ventilators Rear seat heater Windshield wiper de-icer Condenser fan Towing tail light system 10 TOW TAIL - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 608
50 A 30 A 150 A Circuit Second seat adjustment Alternator condenser Front fog lights Security horn Seat heater and ventilators Stoplights, high mounted stoplight, trailer brake system main body ECU, EFI Trailer brake system Rear blower control PTC heater PTC heater PTC heater Maintenance and care - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 609
30 A 25 A 20 A 15 A Each fuse Circuit Air injection driver Air injection driver2 Headlight, daytime running light system ABS ABS Starter system ID code box, smart access system with lights, overhead module Driving position memory system, power back door ECU, third seat adjustment Bus buffer, Lexus - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 610
A 10 A 5A 30 A 10 A Fuel pump Circuit Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system IC-ALT Audio system, radio start, ABS, VSC, steering lock system, Lexus link system Headlight high beam (right) 53 ECU-B1 5A 4 54 DOME1 55 HEAD LH 56 HEAD LL 57 INJ 58 MET 5A 15 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 611
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse 61 HEAD RL Ampere 15 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 5A Circuit Headlight low beams (right) Air injection system, air flow meter No circuit Outside rear view mirror heater 62 EFI NO.2 63 RR A/C NO.2 64 DEF NO.2 616 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 612
maintenance n Driver's side instrument panel Fuse 1 2 CIG BK/UP LP Ampere 15 A 10 A Circuit Cigarette lighter Back-up lights, trailer Stereo component amplifier assembly, parking assist system, multi-display assembly, gateway ECU, radio receiver assembly, main body ECU, Lexus link system - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 613
control switch Air conditioning system, rear heater panel, overhead module, ABS, VSC, steering sensor, yaw rate & G sensor, main body ECU, stoplights, moon roof, anti-glare inside rear view mirror No circuit Cool box, condenser fan, cooler compressor, rear window defogger, exhaust system Tail lights - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 614
, inverter switch, shift lever switch ABS, VSC, tilt and telescopic steering, gateway ECU, shift lock system, parking assist system, cruise control switch, pre-collision system, headlight cleaner, multi-display assembly, rainsensing windshield wiper, driving position memory system, power door lock - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 615
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse 21 RR FOG 22 A/C 23 AM1 24 TI & TE 25 FR P/SEAT RH 26 PWR OUTLET 27 OBD 28 PSB 29 DOOR NO.1 30 FR P/SEAT LH 31 INVERTER Ampere 7.5 A 7.5 A 5A 15 A 30 A 15 A 7.5 A 30 A 25 A 30 A 15 A No circuit Circuit Air conditioning system No circuit Tilt and telescopic - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 616
) No circuit Active height control Active height control VGRS, power back door, rear ECU, active height control, third seat adjustment, tire pressure monitor ECU Ventilators Seat heaters Adaptive front lighting system Adaptive front lighting system, radar cruise control system Multi-display assembly - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 617
it-yourself maintenance n After a fuse is replaced l If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (→P. 623) dealer. l If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus n If there is an overload in the circuits The fuses - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 618
on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer. n Prepare a replacement light bulb. Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (→P. 699) n Remove the engine - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 619
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Rear bulb locations Rear turn signal light Back-up light 624 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 620
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Replacing light bulbs n Headlight low beams STEP 1 For the left side only: Remove the securing bolt and move the washer fluid filler opener. STEP 2 Turn the cover counterclockwise and remove it. 4 Maintenance and care 625 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 621
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 3 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. STEP 4 Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release. 626 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 622
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Headlight high beam STEP 1 Turn the cover counterclockwise and remove it. STEP 2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 4 STEP 3 Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release. Maintenance and care 627 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 623
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Front fog lights STEP 1 Remove the fender liner bolts, loose the fender liner nut and remove the fender liner. Fender liner nut Fender liner bolts STEP 2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. STEP 3 Unplug the connector while pushing the lock release. 628 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 624
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Parking lights STEP 1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. STEP 2 Remove the light bulb. 4 Maintenance and care 629 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 625
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Front turn signal lights STEP 1 Remove the fender liner bolts, loose the fender liner nut and remove the fender liner. Fender liner nut Fender liner bolts STEP 2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. STEP 3 Remove the light bulb. 630 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 626
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Back-up lights STEP 1 Open the back door and remove the bolts and the cover. STEP 2 Turn the bulb bases counterclockwise. 4 STEP 3 Remove the light bulb. Maintenance and care 631 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 627
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n Rear turn signal lights STEP 1 Open the back door and remove the bolts and lamp assembly. STEP 2 Turn the bulb bases counterclockwise. STEP 3 Remove the light bulb. 632 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 628
have it replaced by your Lexus dealer. l Front side marker lights l High mounted stoplight l Stop/tail lights l Tail lights l Rear side marker lights l License plate lights n Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens Contact your Lexus dealer, for more information in the following situations - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 629
the bulb by the plastic or metal portion. If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack. l Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 630
5-1. Essential information Emergency flashers Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an accident. Press the switch to flash all the turn signal lights. To turn them off, press the switch once again. NOTICE n To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 631
by your Lexus dealer, such as or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws. Use a towing dolly or flat bed truck. Before towing The following may indicate a problem with your - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 632
5-1. Essential information Emergency towing If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the following part. This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds. A driver must be in the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 633
5-1. Essential information CAUTION n While towing l Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or damage to the transmission l Never tow this vehicle wheels on the ground. l Use only the front emergency towing hooks or towing eyelets when towing your vehicle. 5 When - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 634
5-1. Essential information Towing with a sling-type truck NOTICE n To prevent body damage Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear. Towing with a wheel lift-type truck From front Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. 640 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 635
5-1. Essential information From rear Use a towing dolly under the front wheels. NOTICE n To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission Never tow this vehicle end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed. 5 When trouble arises 641 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 636
5-1. Essential information Using a flat bed truck If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration. When attaching the hooks to the rear of the vehicle, make sure to attach them to the inside of the vehicle. If you use chains or - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 637
information If you think something is wrong If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. n Visible symptoms l Fluid leaks under the vehicle (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use exhaust - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 638
is activated. STEP 1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to ACCESSORY mode or OFF. Restart the engine. STEP 2 NOTICE n Before starting the engine Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 639
vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 640
's owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained l Officially requested by the police or other authorities l Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit l Ordered by a court However, if necessary Lexus will: l Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance l Disclose - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 641
. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning light Warning light/Details • Low brake fluid • Malfunction in the brake system This - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 642
cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer, immediately. Warning light Warning light/Details Indicates a malfunction in: • The emission control system; • The electronic engine control system; • The electronic throttle control system; • The electronic automatic transmission - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 643
fuel is about 4.0 gal. (15.0 L, 3.3 Imp. gal.) or less Refuel the vehicle. *2 Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt. Fasten the seat belt. 5 (on the center panel) *2 Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt. Fasten the seat belt. When trouble arises When the light - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 644
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure Shift four-wheel drive control Indicates that the transmisout of "N". (→P. 256) sion "Park" mechanism is not engaged. A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on or flashes to indicate that the master - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 645
? If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately. l Is the fuel tank cap loose? If it is, tighten it securely. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips. If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 646
airbag sensors l The seat belt buckle switches l The driver's seat position sensor l The inflators l The interconnecting wiring and power sources l The front passenger occupant classification ECU l "AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights l The seatbelt pretensioners l The roll sensing of - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 647
Lexus wheels are used. (Even if you use Lexus light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently 5 If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking 1 minute frequently when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have it checked by Lexus dealer. When trouble - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 648
pressure warning light comes on Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer. l Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 649
system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). 5 When trouble arises 655 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 650
properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 651
a message is being shown on the multi-information display. Multi-information display If any of the warning messages is shown again after its correction procedure has been performed, contact your Lexus dealer. Messages and warnings The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 652
light Warning buzzer* Warning Indicates an important situation, such as when a system related to driving is malfunctioning or that danger may result if the correction procedure is not performed . Indicates an important situation, such as when the system shown on the multi-information - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 653
589) If the message remains on, the system may have malfunctioned. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. n Warning messages in the cruise control mode In the following instances, there is a possibility that the approach warning will not illuminate even when vehicle - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 654
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you have a flat tire Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided. n Before jacking up the vehicle l Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface. l Set the parking brake. l Shift the shift lever to "P". l Turn off the 4-Wheel AHC. (→P. 242) l Stop - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 655
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Taking out the jack STEP 1 Remove the cover. STEP 2 Loosen Tighten Loosen and remove the jack. 5 When trouble arises 661 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 656
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Taking out the tool box STEP 1 Remove the cover. STEP 2 Take out the tool box. 662 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 657
. 5 STEP 2 Insert the jack handle extension into the lowering screw. Lower Raise Place a rag under the jack handle extension to protect the back door. When trouble arises 663 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 658
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency STEP 3 Lower the spare tire completely to the ground. STEP 4 Pull out the spare tire and remove the holding bracket. Replacing a flat tire STEP 1 Chock the tires. 664 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 659
In front of the front right-hand side tire In front of the front left-hand side tire Rear STEP 2 Pry off the wheel ornament, using the beveled end of the wheel ornament remover as shown. STEP 3 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn). 5 When - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 660
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency STEP 4 Position the jack at the jack points as shown. Front - Under the chassis frame side rail Rear - Under the rear axle housing STEP 5 Assemble the jack handle extension as shown. Be sure to tighten each bolt securely. 666 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 661
tire. When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface. 5 When trouble arises 667 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 662
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Installing the spare tire STEP 1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface. If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle. STEP 2 Install - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 663
raising. After raising, visually check that the tire is not interfering with suspension components. Stow the tools and jack securely, and replace all covers. 5 When trouble arises n After completing the tire change The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (→P. 589) 669 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 664
, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle. l Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point. l Be sure to turn off the active height control suspension and stop the engine. l Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 665
the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury. l Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving. 5 When trouble arises 671 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 666
or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires. 672 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 667
fuel in the vehicle's tank. Refuel the vehicle. l The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures. (→P. 166) l There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (→P. 108) n The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 668
the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. l ACCESSORY mode. STEP 4 Push and hold the "ENGINE START STOP" switch about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly. Even if the engine can be started using - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 669
shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer, immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 670
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you lose your keys New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer, using one of the other keys and the key number stamped on your key number plate. 676 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 671
cannot operate back door opener If the back door opener does not operate, there may be a problem with the back door opener system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the back door can be opened from the inside - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 672
between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (→P. 34) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart entry & start system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened or the engine can be started by following - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 673
the engine STEP 1 STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to "P" and apply the brakes. Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key (including the card key) to the "ENGINE START STOP" switch. START STOP" switch still cannot be operated, contact your Lexus dealer. STEP 3 5 When trouble arises 679 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 674
battery As this above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (→P. 605) n Alarm Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system. If a door is unlocked - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 675
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the battery is discharged The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle's battery is discharged. You can call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop. If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12- - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 676
started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected. Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer, as soon as possible. 682 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 677
emitted from the battery. l Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal. l Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the "+" and "-" termi- nals. l Do not allow open - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 678
or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. l Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. l Do not allow children near the battery. NOTICE n When handling jumper cables Be careful that the jumper cables do not - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 679
engine running and carefully lift the hood. Remove the engine compartment cover. (→P. 570) Check to see if the cooling fan is operating. If the fan is If the fan is not operating: Stop the engine and call your Lexus dealer. After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, check the engine coolant level - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 680
Steps to take in an emergency STEP 6 Add engine coolant if necessary. Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable. (→P. 694) Have the vehicle checked at the nearest your Lexus dealer, as soon as possible. n Overheating If you observe the following, your vehicle may be - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 681
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency NOTICE n When adding engine coolant Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant. When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine. 5 When trouble arises 687 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 682
area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution. n When shifting the shift lever Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 683
Dimensions and weights Overall length Overall width Overall height*1 Wheelbase Tread Front Rear 196.5 in. (4990 mm) 77.6 in. (1970 mm) 75.6 in. (1920 mm)*2 75.2 in. (1910 mm)*3 73.4 in. (1865 mm)*4 112.2 in. (2850 mm) 64.6 in. (1640 mm) 64.4 in. (1635 mm) 1230 lb. (560 kg) Vehicle capacity weight - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 684
identification number The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel. This number is - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 685
V type, 4-cycle, gasoline 3.70 x 4.02 in. (94.0 x 102.0 mm) 345.6 cu.in. (5663 cm3) Automatic adjustment Automatic adjustment Fuel Fuel type Octane rating Fuel tank capacity (Reference) Premium unleaded gasoline only 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher 24.5 gal. (93 L, 20.4 lmp.gal.) 692 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 686
6-1. Specifications Lubrication system Oil capacity Drain and refill (Reference) With filter Without filter Oil grade 7.4 qt. (7.0 L, 6.2 Imp.qt.) 7.0 qt. (6.6 L, 5.8 Imp.qt.) ILSAC multigrade engine oil Use Lexus approved "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent to satisfy the grade and viscosity - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 687
Cooling system Capacity 17.6 qt. (16.7 L, 14.6 Imp.qt.) Use either of the following. • "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology Do not use plain water - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 688
Differential Oil capacity Front Rear Oil type and viscosity 2.01 qt. (1.90 L, 1.67 lmp.qt.) 4.44 qt. (4.20 L, 3.70 lmp.qt.) Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LT 75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent "Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil" is filled in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. Use Lexus approved - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 689
(11.6 L, 10.2 lmp.qt.) Toyota Genuine ATF WS Fluid type The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer. NOTICE n Automatic transmission fluid type Using transmission fluid other than "Toyota Genuine ATF WS" may cause deterioration in shift - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 690
of 45.0 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf) Chassis lubrication Propeller shafts Spider Slide yoke Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2 Molybdenum-disulfide lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2 or Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2 6 Steering Vehicle specifications Free play Power steering fluid type - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 691
6-1. Specifications Suspension Fluid type Suspension fluid AHC Tires and wheels Tire size P285/60R18 114V, P285/50R20 111V Normal driving Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Trailer towing Add 2 psi (10 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 692
Exterior Parking lights Front fog lights Rear turn signal lights Back-up lights Running board lights Front interior light Rear interior lights Vanity lights Interior Door courtesy lights Glove box light Luggage compartment light Deck light* A: C: E: *: H11 halogen bulbs Wedge base bulbs Double - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 693
.5-M93 in Canada. n Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps. n If your engine knocks l Consult your Lexus dealer. l You may occasionally notice light knocking for - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 694
Tricarbonyl). Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service. 701 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 695
to your vehicle's three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction. l Do not use gasohol other than that stated here. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. l Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 696
6-1. Specifications Tire information Typical tire symbols Tire size Summer tire or all season tire (→P. 705) (→P. 591) An all season tire has "M+S" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "M+S" is a - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 697
DOT and tire identification number (TIN) DOT symbol* Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturer's identification mark Tire size code Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) Manufacturing week Manufacturing year *: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 698
size. Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) Section width (millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) Wheel diameter (inches) Load index (2 or 3 digits) Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter) n Tire dimensions Section width - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 699
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.A. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 700
course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. n Traction AA, A, B, C The - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 701
, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and Curb weight coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine The sum of: (a) Curb weight Maximum loaded (b) Accessory weight vehicle weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight 150 lb. (68 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 702
excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously Production options weight considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly Rim upon which - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 703
the load The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall The strands forming the plies in the tire The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 704
Light its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose is fitted for physical dimension requirements Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material The overall diameter of an inflated new - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 705
Sidewall Sidewall separation Meaning A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies A mechanical - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 706
( ) on at least one sidewall The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road A tread section running circumferentially around a tire Pulling away of the tread from the tire - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 707
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus dealership. Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 708
warning function (when locking the vehicle) Default setting ON ON Customized setting OFF OFF ON Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps OFF Wireless remote control (→P. 44) Unlocking operation All doors unlocked in one step Time elapsed before automatic door lock - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 709
Power windows (→P. 100) Mechanical key linked operation (open) Wireless remote control linked operation (open) Linked entry function Light sensor sensitivity Automatic light control system (→P. 187) Daytime running light system Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 710
Times of the linked operation when the shift lever in "R" position Time period before lights turn off Operation after the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned off ON OFF the electronic key on your person (When the interior light switch [ON/ DOOR/OFF] is DOOR) ON OFF 6 ON OFF Vehicle - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 711
) Mechanical key linked operation (close) Linked operation of components when door key is used Wireless remote control linked operation (open) Linked operation of components when wireless remote control used Linked entry function Default setting ON ON Customized setting OFF OFF Moon roof (→P. 102 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 712
6-2. Customization Multi-information display (→P. 184) English (U.S.A.), English (UK), French, German, Spanish, Italian, Japanese, Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese Available languages 6 Vehicle specifications 719 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 713
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on the vehicle. Item When to initialize • After reconnecting or changing the battery with power back door opened • After changing a fuse with - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 714
receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 715
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual. See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English. 7 For owners 723 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 716
724 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 717
Front-lighting System Active Height Control Suspension Automatic Locking Retractor Adaptive Variable Suspension Child Restraint System Display Electronic Control Unit Event Data Recorder Emergency Locking Retractor Gross Axle Weight Rating Gross Combination Weight Rating Gross Vehicle Weight Rating - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 718
Board Diagnostics Pre-Collision System Power Right Roll Sensing of Curtain Shield Airbag Supplemental Restraint System Tire Identification Number Tire Pressure Monitoring (Warning) System Traction Control Variable Gear Ratio Steering Vehicle Identification Number Vehicle Stability - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 719
...349 AUX adapter ...415 CD player/changer...352 DVD player/changer ...352 MP3/WMA disc...359 Optimal use ...390 Radio ...343 Steering wheel audio switch...416 Video CD ...363 Automatic air conditioning system ...322 Automatic headlight leveling system ...190 Automatic light control system ...187 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 720
...511 Brake Fluid...697 Parking brake...176 Brake assist...265 Break-in tips ...157 Brightness control Instrument light control ...179 C Care Exterior ...552 Interior...555 Seat belts ...556 Cargo capacity ...281 Cargo hooks ...529 CD changer ...352 CD player...352 Center differential lock/unlock - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 721
30, 44, 47 Side mirrors...97 Driver's seat belt reminder light...649 Driving Break-in tips...157 Correct posture...114 Off-road precautions...276 Procedures...156 Winter driving tips...289 Driving position memory...77 DVD player/changer ...352 Dynamic radar cruise control ...207 E Electronic key If - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 722
Front seats Adjustment...58 Driving position memory...77 Front turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs...630 Wattage...699 Fuel Capacity ...692 Fuel gauge...178 Fuel pump shut off system...644 Information ...700 Refueling...105 Type ...692 *: Refer to the "Navigation System Owner's Manual". 731 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 723
test...563 Identification Engine ...691 Vehicle...691 Ignition Engine switch ...166 Keys...26 Ignition switch ...166 Ignition switch ...166 Illuminated entry system...502 Indicator lights ...181 Inside rear view mirror...96 Instrument panel light control...179 Interior lights Interior lights list - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 724
...187 Interior light switch...503 Personal light switch...504 Replacing light bulbs ...623 Turn signal lever...175 Vanity lights...517 Wattage ...699 Load capacity ...288 Lock steering column...168 Luggage compartment lights Switch...505 Wattage ...699 Meter Instrument panel light control...179 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 725
lights Switch ...504 Power back door ...53 Power outlet...522 Power steering Fluid ...697 Power windows ...100 Pre-collision system...272 R Radar cruise control women, proper seat belt use...89 Reminder light...649 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners...723 Seat belt pretensioners ...88 Seat - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 726
light switch ...636 Ignition switch...166 Light switches ...187 Power back door...53 Power door lock switch ...47 Power window switch ...100 Rear window wiper and washer switch...199 Window lock switch...100 Wipers and washer switch...196, 199 *: Refer to the "Navigation System Owner's Manual - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 727
Tools...660 Total load capacity ...690 Touch screen...312 Towing Dinghy towing ...308 Emergency towing...638 Trailer towing ...294 Traction control...265 TRAC ...265 Trailer towing ...294 Trip information display ...184 Trip meter ...178 Turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs...630, 632 Switch - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 728
buzzers Brake system...647 Open door ...649 Seat belt reminder ...649 Warning lights Anti-lock brake system ...648 Brake system...647 Charging system...648 Fuel level ...649 Malfunction indicator lamp ...648 Master warning light...650 Open door ...649 Pre-collision system...648 Seat belt reminder - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 729
What to do if... What to do if...A tire punctures P. 660 If you have a flat tire P. 673 If the engine will not start The engine does not start P. 108 Engine immobilizer system P. 681 If the battery is discharged The shift lever cannot be moved out P. 675 If the shift lever cannot be shifted - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 730
lamp Open door warning light P. 649 Low fuel level warning light P. 649 or P. 648 Driver's seat belt reminder light P. 649 Front passenger's seat belt reminder light P. 649 Unengaged "Park" warning light P. 650 Master warning light SRS warning light P. 648 ABS warning light or P. 648 P. 650 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 731
GAS STATION INFORMATION Fuel filler door P. 105 Auxiliary catch lever P. 568 Tire inflation pressure P. 698 Fuel filler door opener P. 105 Hood lock release lever P. 568 Fuel tank capacity (Reference) Fuel type Cold tire inflation pressure Engine oil capacity Drain and refill (Reference) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 732
Assist P.30 Wide View Front & Side Monitor P.31 l Crawl Control P.31 l Cruise Control P.32 l Dynamic Radar Cruise Control P.33 l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension) P.35 4-Wheel AHC (Active Height Control Suspension) P.35 Active TRAC/VSC Off Mode P.36 Roll Sensing of - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 733
Windows P.66 Moon Roof P.66 Fuel Tank Cap P.67 Hood P.67 Back Door P.68 Responding to warning/indicator lights and other problems that may arise. l l l l l l What to do if ...Customizing Your Lexus What to do if ...Customizing Your Lexus A list of features that can be customized. Depending on - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 734
switches Door lock switch Fuel filler door opener Hood lock release lever P.65 P.66 P.66 P.65 P.67 P.67 Tire pressure warning reset switch P.36 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch P.23 "DISP" switch Distance switch∗ P.28 P.33 See P. 6 Cruise control switch P.32, 33 3 Quick_LX570_U - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 735
Air conditioning system Audio system P.50 P.48 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers P.45 Emergency flashers Glove box P.57 P.29 See P.7 Console box P.56 Cool box∗ P.57 ∗ : If equipped 4 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 736
Overview A Instrument Panel Headlight cleaner switch∗ P.45 Instrument panel light control P.45 Power back door switch∗ "AFS OFF" switch P.40 P.68 Easy access mode switch Power outlet main switch P.35 P.59 Outside rear view mirror switches P.22 5 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 737
B "VIEW" switch∗ P.31 P.30 Intuitive parking assist switch∗ Engine (ignition) switch P.25 Center differential lock/ unlock switch P.30 "VSC OFF" switch Power back door off switch∗ P.68 Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch P.36 P.36 ∗ : If equipped 6 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 738
P.29 Instrument Panel Ashtray P.54 Cigarette lighter Shift lever P.26 P.54 Climate control seat/seat heater switches∗ P.55 AUX adapter P.51 Power outlet P.59 Parking brake lever Four-wheel drive control switch Crawl Control switch Height select switch P.27 P.30 P.31 P.35 Damping mode select - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 739
pull. n Wireless remote control 1 Press: locks all doors 2 Press once: unlocks the driver's door Press twice: unlocks all doors Press and hold: opens the windows and moon roof 3 Press and hold: opens and closes the back door * 4 Press and hold: sounds the alarm (Use - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 740
roof, press and hold the button. Driving Comfort Opening and Closing n Locking and unlocking the back door 1 Lock 2 Unlock What to do if ...Customizing Your Lexus For details on what to do when the electronic key does not operate properly, see page 72. 10 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 741
preparation state. When the indicator light begins to flash, the system is armed. To deactivate or stop the alarm: start the engine, or unlock the doors using the entry function or the wireless remote control. n Steering lock The steering lock is engaged when the driver's door is opened with the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 742
forward 2 Reclines the seatback n Adjusting the seat cushion 1 Raises and lowers the front of the cushion 2 Raises and lowers the entire seat n Adjusting the lumbar support 1 Firmer 2 Softer 13 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 743
Before Driving Entering and Exiting n Adjusting the seat cushion length (driver's seat only) 1 Lengthens the seat cushion 2 n Tumbling the second seats Customizing Your Lexus 14 Before tumbling the second seats, stow the seat belt buckles and lower the head restrains to the lowest position. The - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 744
Topic 2 Before Driving Fold down the seatback while pulling the seatback angle adjustment lever, and swing the whole seat up and forward. Hook the holding strap to the assist grip and secure the seat by pulling its free end. When returning the second seat to its original position, stow the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 745
in the cover set in the roof l Center head restraint: stowed in the seat back For the way of stowing, see the Owner's Manual. Vehicles with manual switches Press the third seat table mode switch. The Comfort Opening and Closing What to do if ...Customizing Your Lexus 16 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 746
with the seat belt hangers l Center seat belt: stowed in the cover set in the roof l Center head restraint: stowed in the seat back For the way of stowing, see the Owner's Manual. Vehicles with manual switches Press and hold the third seat tumbling switch. The switch for the left side third seat is - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 747
third seat 2 Left side third seat Before Driving When Driving Rain and Night Driving Driving Comfort Opening and Closing What to do if ...Customizing Your Lexus 18 Remove the seat hook covers from the back of the seat cushion, and install them on the seat hooks. Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 748
hook covers from the floor and install them into the back of the seat cushion. Vehicles with manual switches Pull the third seat lock release lever and lower the seat, then lock the seat leg handles located on the rear of the seatbacks and raise the head restraints. 19 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 749
Recalling wireless remote control until Owner's Manual". *: If equipped Linking driving position memory to the door unlock operation allows the memory position to be recalled automatically when the driver's door is opened. (The linked function does not operate if the driver's door is unlocked using - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 750
, push it down while pressing the lock release button. 2 Angle adjustment (front seat only) n Third outboard seats Pull the head restraint angle lever to fold the head restraint. Seat Belts n Adjusting shoulder belt height (front seats, second outboard seats only) To raise: pull the anchor upward - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 751
"R": right) 2 Adjust the mirror up, down, in, or out using the Before Driving switch The mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle Driving Comfort Opening and Closing What to do if ...Customizing Your Lexus 22 Putting the switch in the neutral position allows the folding or - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 752
Mirror The mirror uses a sensor to detect light from vehicles behind and automatically reduces glare. To turn automatic mode on/off, press the "AUTO" button. The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned on. Steering Wheel 1 2 3 4 Up Down Toward the driver Away from the driver The steering - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 753
used to start the engine.) n Starting the engine Make sure the parking brake is engaged and the shift lever is in "P". Depress the brake pedal. The "ENGINE START STOP" switch indicator light Indicator light: off) ACCESSORY mode IGNITION ON mode (Indicator light: amber) 25 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 754
ON mode and the brake pedal is depressed. Before Driving When Driving Rain and Night Driving n "S" mode "S" mode allows the driver to select the shift range manually based on driving conditions. Shift the shift lever to "S". To upshift: shift the shift lever toward "+". To downshift: shift the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 755
items shown below. n Display information l Trip information • Average vehicle speed • Driving distance • Driving range • Average fuel consumption • Current fuel consumption • Outside temperature l Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped) l Dynamic radar cruise control settings (if equipped - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 756
Rain and Night Driving n When using the intuitive parking assist or dynamic radar cruise control, the appropriate display is shown on the screen. n If a problem is detected in any of the vehicle's systems, a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Turn Signal Lever 1 Left - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 757
Flasher Switch Engaging the emergency flasher switch causes all the turn signal lights to flash. Mode Select Switch Use the mode select switch to select the driving mode that best suits the driving and road conditions. 1 Power mode For more powerful acceleration and uphill driving. Normal mode - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 758
system uses a screen display and buzzer to inform the driver of obstacles near the vehicle when parking or driving at low speed. ON/OFF The indicator light comes on to inform the driver that the system is operational. For details, see the "Owner's Manual". What to do if ...Customizing Your Lexus 30 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 759
at the same time. This system helps the driver check for front and side of the vehicle. ON/OFF The display can be changed by pressing the "VIEW" switch. For details, see the "Owner's Manual". Crawl Control Crawl Control allows travel on extremely rough off-road surfaces at a fixed low speed without - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 760
Entering and Exiting Cruise Control (If equipped) Cruise control allows the driver to maintain a constant speed without having to operate the accelerator pedal. Use for highway driving or when traveling at a constant speed for long periods of time. 1 Indicator 2 Cruise control switch Before - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 761
is reached. Dynamic Radar Cruise Control (If equipped) Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode. 1 2 3 4 Indicator Display Cruise control switch Distance switch n Cruise control display Cruise control settings are shown on - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 762
adjusted using the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control switch. Before Driving n Constant speed cruise control Opening and Closing cruise control, pull the lever toward you. To resume the cruise control, pull the distance control mode maintains the preset cruising speed as long as no - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 763
Topic 3 When Driving AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension) AVS controls the suspension and steering wheel operation according to the road and driving conditions. To select a driving mode, shift the damping mode select switch forward or backward. 1 For high speed driving 2 For ordinary driving 3 For - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 764
control system or vehicle stability control system. Use this switch if the wheels get stuck in snow, mud etc. To turn off Active TRAC: Push the VSC OFF switch briefly. The slip indicator light pressure. For details, see the "Owner's Manual". Customizing Your Lexus 36 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 765
Topic 3 When Driving 37 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 766
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on. 2 The headlights and all lights listed above turn on. 3 The headlights and all lights listed above turn on/off automatically in accordance with ambient light levels. To engage the high beams, push the lever forward - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 767
and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of the light axis of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire angle that are controlled by steering input. The system can be turned on and off using the "AFS OFF" switch. What to do if ...Customizing Your - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 768
Topic 4 Rain and Night Driving Fog Lights Type A The fog lights can be used only when the headlights (low beam) are on. Type B The fog lights can be used only when the headlights (low beam) are on. 41 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 769
Low speed High speed Operates once Before Driving When Driving Rain and Night Driving Driving Comfort Opening and Closing What to do if ...Customizing Your Lexus 42 Automatic operation: Sensitivity can be adjusted by turning the band. To spray washer fluid, pull the lever. The wipers will operate - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 770
Topic 4 Rain and Night Driving Type B 1 2 3 4 Automatic operation Low speed High speed Operates once Automatic operation: Sensitivity can be adjusted by turning the band. To spray washer fluid, pull the lever. The wipers will operate automatically. 43 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 771
Rain and Night Driving Driving Comfort Opening and Closing Type B 1 2 3 4 Intermittent operation Normal operation Washer operation Washer/wiper operation What to do if ...Customizing Your Lexus 44 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 772
and Night Driving Headlight Cleaner (If equipped) The headlight cleaner can be used only when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode and cancel. The system turns off automatically after 15 minutes. Instrument Panel Light Control 1 Brighter 2 Darker 45 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 773
"Phone", "Telephone" 7 "Calendar" 8 "Adjust Clock" 9 "LEXUS Park Assist" 10 "Language" 1 1 "Screen Setting" *: See Navigation System Owner's Manual. 47 This display appears. Air conditioning operation screen Audio control screen Display screen Information screen Maintenance screen* Telephone screen - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 774
operation screen display button Driver's side temperature control Automatic mode Rear air conditioning operation screen display switch Individual mode switch Passenger's side temperature control What to do if ... n Using the automatic mode Press . . Customizing Your Lexus Adjust the temperature - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 775
and the passenger side temperature Adjust the driver side temperature using using . To adjust the temperature for the rear seats, see below. Rear Air Conditioning System 1 Left side temperature control 2 Automatic mode 3 Right side temperature control To use the automatic mode, press adjust the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 776
and Night Driving Driving Comfort Opening and Closing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Audio control screen display button* Disc eject button AM•SAT radio mode button Power ON/OFF button, Volume be made in each mode. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual. Customizing Your Lexus 50 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 777
your CD/DVD player. l Press and insert a disc into the disc slot. l Press with the disc inserted. For further information, refer to the Owner's Manual. n Using the AUX adapter Push the lid to open. Open the cover and connect the portable audio device. Press . n Remote control (steering switches - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 778
rear passengers to enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the front audio system navigation system only Rain and Night Driving n Remote control Driving Comfort Opening and Closing What to do if ... To use jacks Customizing Your Lexus 52 To listen to the rear audio, use headphones. 1 Headphone - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 779
Topic 5 Driving Comfort Hands-free System (For Cellular Phone) To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth® phone in the system. For details, see the Owner's Manual. The button positions, shapes and screen may slightly vary depending on the type of the system. n Making a call - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 780
the ashtray, pull it out. What to do if ... Cigarette Lighter Push the cigarette lighter in. The cigarette lighter will pop up when ready for use. Customizing Your Lexus 54 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 781
Seats/Seat heaters (If equipped) Front seat heaters Press the knob to pop out 1 , and turn the knob toward 2 to adjust the seat temperature. Climate control seats Press the knob to pop out 1 , and turn the knob to adjust the seat temperature. 2 Off 3 Ventilation 4 Cool air 5 Warm air Rear seat - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 782
Opening and Closing Instrument panel To open, press in the button. What to do if ... Rear armrest To open, press in the button. Customizing Your Lexus 56 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 783
on. Press the switch again to turn it off. Glove Box 1 Open: press the button. 2 Lock 3 Unlock The glove box can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key. 57 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 784
To open, press the button on the rear center armrest. Rain and Night Driving Driving Comfort Opening and Closing What to do if ...Customizing Your Lexus 58 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 785
Interior Lights 1 OFF 2 The light comes on if a door is opened. 3 ON Power Outlet 12V DC Designed for use with car accessories. The "ENGINE START STOP" switch must be in ACCESSARY or IGNITION ON mode for this power outlet to be used. 115V AC Designed for use with electrical appliances. To use - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 786
owners: While pressing the HomeLink® button, repeatedly press and release (cycle) the button on the hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash. If your garage door is of the rolling code type: Press the training button on the motor-head - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 787
an entry gate, see the Owner's Manual. To program other devices, contact your Lexus dealer. For Canadian owners: To program all devices, follow the same procedure as for garage door programming. n Operating HomeLink® Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The indicator light should come on. 61 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 788
call Volume control Adjusts your Lexus Link System audio volume Phone button • Makes or answers a phone call using the hands-free personal calling service • Ends a call "SERVICES" button • Contacts the Lexus Link Call Center for information, directions or other services • Records a conversation - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 789
Stolen vehicle location assistance If your vehicle is stolen, call the Lexus Link Call Center and then select the option for Lexus Link. l Remote horn/lights and remote door lock/unlock The remote operations are performed by contacting the Lexus Link Call Center from the outside of the vehicle. When - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 790
lock button 1 Locks 2 Unlocks Door lock switch Operates all door locks. 1 Locks 2 Unlocks n Locking the vehicle from outside Using the entry function or wireless remote control (→P.9, 10) n Rear door child-protector lock Setting the switch to the LOCK position prevents the rear doors from being - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 791
switch The window lock switch disables the operation of all windows other than the driver's door window. 2 Power window switches To open: press the switch. To close open. 2 Close To stop partway, press the switch lightly. n Tilt up and down 1 Tilt up 2 Tilt down What to do if ... To stop - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 792
Topic 6 Opening and Closing Fuel Tank Cap Press the fuel filler door opener. Slowly remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise. Hood Pull the hood lock release lever. Insert your fingers under the hood, pull the hood catch and lift the hood. 67 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 793
OFF" switch. n Back door easy closer (if equipped) If the back door is left slightly open, it will close automatically. n Entry function and wireless remote control →P.9,10 Customizing Your Lexus 68 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 794
. Charging system warning light Have the vehicle inspected immediately. (U.S.A.) Malfunction indicator lamp (Canada) SRS warning light Pre-collision system warning light* (U.S.A.) (Canada) ABS warning light For further information, refer to the Owner's Manual. 69 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 795
Owner's Manual Rain and Night Driving Turn signal indicator Headlight high beam indicator Headlight indicator (U.S.A.) Tail light indicator (Canada) Fog light indicator "PWR" mode indicator Cruise control Lexus (On the center panel) For further information, refer to the Owner's Manual. * - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 796
What to do if ... Spare Tire and Tool Compartment n Jack, tools, and spare tire 1 Tools 2 Jack 3 Spare tire n Taking out the spare tire Lift up the cover. Insert the jack handle extension into the lowering screw and lower the spare tire. 71 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 797
Unlocking and locking the doors To unlock or lock the vehicle, use the mechanical key. The mechanical key is stored inside the electronic Lexus 72 If the electronic key battery becomes depleted, replace it with a new battery. For instructions on replacing the battery, refer to the Owner's Manual - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 798
lock, gently turn the wheel left or right while pressing the "ENGINE START STOP" switch. (→P.11) If the engine still does not start, see the Owner's Manual for more information or contact your Lexus dealer. 73 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 799
. Alarm Situation An attempt was made to lock the doors using the entry function while the electronic key was still inside the Interior alarm pings continuously*1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF and close the driver's door. What to do if ... Close the driver's door. Customizing Your Lexus - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 800
START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON or ACCESSORY mode, the driver's door was closed after the key was carried outside procedure Interior alarm sounds continuously*1 Shift the shift lever driver's door again Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle *1: A message will be shown on the multi-information - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 801
Entering and Exiting Before Driving When Driving Rain and Night Driving Driving Comfort Opening and Closing What to do if ... Customizing Your Lexus 76 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 802
vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus dealership. Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 803
Item Function Unlocking using a key Default setting Driver's door unlocked in 1step, all doors unlocked in 2steps Mechanical key linked operation (close) Wireless remote control linked operation (open) Linked entry function What to do if ...Customizing Your Lexus 78 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 804
Customizing Your Lexus Default setting ON ON Slide only ON Slide only ON Level 3 30 seconds components when door key is used Wireless remote control linked operation (open) Linked operation of components when wireless remote control used Linked entry function Light sensor sensitivity Time elapsed - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 805
shift lever in "R" position Time elapsed before lights turn off Operation when the doors are the electronic key on your person (When the interior light switch [ON/ DOOR/OFF] is DOOR) Driving Vehicles sold outside Canada What to do if ... n Multi-information display Available languages English - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 806
Memo 81 Quick_LX570_U (OM60E01U) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 807
) n CANADIAN OWNERS l In Canada or the U.S. mainland: Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service 1-800-26-LEXUS or 1-800-265-3987 (Toll-Free) Please access our websites for further information. l The U.S. mainland: www.lexus.com l Hawaii: www.servcolexus.com l Canada: www.lexus.ca ©2008 TOYOTA MOTOR - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 808
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΣΕΧΤΙΟΝ ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Βασιχ ινφορµατιον βεφορε οπερατιον D Ινιτιαλ σχρεεν D Τουχη σχρεεν οπερατιον D Ινπυττινγ λεττερσ ανδ νυµβερσ/Λιστ σχρεεν οπερατιον D Φυνχτιον ηελπ D Μαπ σχρεεν οπερατιον Χυρρεντ ποσιτιον δισπλαψ ...Σχρεεν σχρολλ οπερατιον ...Σωιτχηινγ τηε σχρεενσ ...Μαπ σχαλε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 809
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Ινιτιαλ σχρεεν D Μαιντενανχε ινφορµατιον Τηισ σψστεµ ινφορµσ αβουτ ωηεν το ρεπλαχε χερταιν παρτσ ορ χοµπονεντσ ανδ σηοωσ δεαλερ ινφορµατιον (ιφ ρεγιστερεδ) ον τηε σχρεεν. Ωηεν τηε ϖεηιχλε ρεαχηεσ α πρεϖιουσλψ σετ δριϖινγ διστανχε ορ δατε σπεχιφιεδ φορ α σχηεδυλεδ µαιντενανχε χηεχκ, - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 810
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Τουχη σχρεεν οπερατιον D Μεµο ινφορµατιον Τηισ σψστεµ νοτιφιεσ αβουτ α µεµο εντρψ. Ατ τηε σπεχιφιεδ δατε, τηε µεµο ινφορµα− τιον ωιλλ βε δισπλαψεδ ωηεν τηε ναϖιγατιον σψστεµ ισ ιν οπερατιον. Τηε µεµο ινφορµα− τιον σχρεεν ωιλλ βε δισπλαψεδ εϖερψ τιµε τηε σψστεµ ισ τυρνεδ ον. Τηισ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 811
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Ινπυττινγ λεττερσ ανδ νυµβερσ/Λιστ σχρεεν οπερατιον Ωηεν σεαρχηινγ φορ αν αδδρεσσ ορ α ναµε, ορ εντερινγ α µεµο, λεττερσ ανδ νυµβερσ χαν βε ινπυτ ϖια τηε τουχη σχρεεν. D Το ινπυτ λεττερσ Το δισπλαψ τηε αλπηαβετ κεψσ, τουχη “Α!Ζ” ορ “ ”. ΙΝΦΟΡΜΑΤΙΟΝ Κεψβοαρδ λαψουτ χαν βε χηανγεδ. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 812
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Το ινπυτ νυµβερσ ανδ σψµβολσ Το δισπλαψ τηε νυµβερ κεψσ ανδ σψµβολ κεψσ, τουχη “0!9”. D Το δισπλαψ τηε λιστ Εντερ νυµβερσ ανδ σψµβολσ βψ τουχηινγ τηε νυµβερ κεψσ ανδ σψµβολ κεψσ διρεχτλψ. : Τουχηινγ τηισ βυττον ερασεσ ονε λεττερ. Βψ ηολδινγ τηισ βυττον, λεττερσ ωιλλ χοντινυε το - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 813
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Λιστ σχρεεν οπερατιον Ωηεν α λιστ ισ δισπλαψεδ, υσε τηε αππροπρι− ατε βυττον το σχρολλ τηρουγη τηε λιστ. D Σορτινγ Τηε ορδερ οφ α λιστ δισπλαψεδ ον τηε σχρεεν χαν βε ρεαρρανγεδ. ΤΨ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 814
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Φυνχτιον ηελπ ΤΨ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 815
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Μαπ σχρεεν οπερατιον — — Χυρρεντ ποσιτιον δισπλαψ Ωηεν σταρτινγ τηε ναϖιγατιον σψστεµ, τηε χυρρεντ ποσιτιον ισ δισπλαψεδ φιρστ. Τηισ σχρεεν δισπλαψσ τηε χυρρεντ ϖεηιχλε ποσιτιον ανδ α µαπ οφ τηε συρρουνδινγ λοχαλ αρεα. — Σχρεεν σχρολλ οπερατιον (ονε!τουχη σχρολλ) Ωηεν ανψ ποιντ ον - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 816
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Το σετ τηε χυρσορ ποσιτιον ασ α δεσ− τινατιον Α σπεχιφιχ ποιντ ον τηε µαπ χαν βε σετ ασ α δεστινατιον υσινγ τηε ονε!τουχη σχρολλ φυνχτιον. D Το ρεγιστερ τηε χυρσορ ποσιτιον ασ α µεµορψ ποιντ Μεµορψ ποιντ ρεγιστρατιον εναβλεσ εασψ αχχεσσ το α σπεχιφιχ ποιντ. Τουχη “Εντερ ”. Τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 817
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Το σεε ινφορµατιον αβουτ τηε ιχον ωηερε τηε χυρσορ ισ σετ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 818
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΜΕΜΟΡΨ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 819
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Σωιτχηινγ τηε σχρεενσ Ανψ ονε οφ τηε σχρεεν χονφιγυρατιονσ χαν βε σελεχτεδ . ∆επενδινγ ον τηε χονδιτιονσ, χερταιν σχρεεν χονφιγυρατιον βυττονσ χαννοτ βε σελεχτεδ. : Το δισπλαψ τηε σινγλε µαπ σχρεεν. (Σεε παγε 33.) : Το δισπλαψ τηε δυαλ µαπ σχρεεν. (Σεε παγε 33.) : Το δισπλαψ τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 820
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Σχρεεν χονφιγυρατιονσ ΣΙΝΓΛΕ ΜΑ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 821
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Μαπ σχαλε ΧΟΜ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 822
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Φοοτ πριντ µαπ Φορ τηε αρεα ωηιχη ισ χοϖερεδ βψ τηε φοοτ πριντ µαπ (Σοµε αρεασ ιν τηε φολλοωινγ χιτ− ιεσ: ∆ετροιτ, Χηιχαγο, Ν.Ψ., Λ.Α), ψου χαν σωιτχη το τηε φοοτ πριντ µαπ ον α σχαλε οφ 75 φεετ (25 µ). D Το σωιτχη το τηε φοοτ πριντ µαπ χηανγεσ ιντο ωηεν τηε µαπ ισ σχαλεδ δοων το - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 823
ΒΑΣΙΧ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Οριεντατιον οφ τηε µαπ Τηε οριεντατιον οφ τηε µαπ χαν βε χηανγεδ φροµ Νορτη!υπ το Ηεαδινγ!υπ βψ τουχηινγ τηε οριεντατιον σψµβολ ατ τηε τοπ λεφτ οφ τηε σχρεεν. Τουχη ορ . ∆εταιλσ οφ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 824
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ ΣΕΧΤΙΟΝ ∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ D Θυιχκ ρεφερενχε (“∆εστινατιον” σχρεεν) D ∆εστινατιον σεαρχη Σελεχτινγ τηε ρεγιον το σεαρχη ...∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ Ηοµε ...∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ Θυιχκ αχχεσσ ...∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ “Αδδρεσσ” ...∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 825
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ Θυιχκ ρεφερενχε (“∆εστινατιον” σχρεεν) Τηε “∆εστινατιον” σχρεεν αλλοωσ ψου το σεαρχη φορ α δεστινατιον. Το δισπλαψ τηε “∆εστινα− τιον” σχρεεν, πυση τηε “∆ΕΣΤ” βυττον. “Αδδρεσσ” Α ηουσε νυµβερ ανδ τηε στρεετ αδδρεσσ χαν βε ινπυτ βψ υσινγ τηε ινπυτ κεψσ...43 2 “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 826
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ ∆εστινατιον σεαρχη — 8 “Ιντερσεχτιον” Τηε ναµεσ οφ τωο ιντερσεχτινγ στρεετσ χαν βε εντερεδ. Τηισ ισ ηελπφυλ ιφ ονλψ τηε γεν− εραλ ϖιχινιτψ, νοτ τηε σπεχιφιχ αδδρεσσ, ισ κνοων...57 9 “Φρεεωαψ Εντ./Εξιτ” Τηε ναµε οφ α φρεεωαψ (ιντερστατε) εν− τρανχε ορ εξιτ χαν βε εντερεδ...58 10 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 827
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ — Σελεχτινγ τηε ρεγιον το σεαρχη ΣΕΛΕΧΤΙΝΓ ΤΗΕ ΡΕΓΙΟΝ ΤΟ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ ΟΝ ΤΗΕ ∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΧΡΕΕΝ 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 828
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ Υ.Σ.Α. Βυττον “ΥΣ1” “ΥΣ2” Στατεσ ινχλυδεδ ιν τηε σεαρχη ρεγιον Ιδαηο Ορεγον Ωασηινγτον Χαλιφορνια Νεϖαδα Αριζονα Χολοραδο Μοντανα Νεω Μεξιχο Υταη Ωψοµινγ Ιοωα Κανσασ Μιννεσοτα Μισσουρι Νορτη ∆ακοτα Νεβρασκα Σουτη ∆ακοτα Οκλαηοµα Τεξασ Ιλλινοισ Ινδιανα Κεντυχκψ Μιχηιγαν Οηιο - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 829
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ — ∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ Ηοµε 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 830
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ — ∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ “Αδδρεσσ” Τηερε αρε 2 ωαψσ το ινπυτ α δεστινατιον βψ αδδρεσσ. 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 831
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ 3. Ωηεν τηε δεσιρεδ στρεετ ναµε ισ φουνδ, τουχη τηε χορρεσπονδινγ βυτ− τον. Τηε σχρεεν χηανγεσ ανδ δισπλαψσ τηε µαπ λοχατιον οφ τηε σελεχτεδ δεστινατιον ανδ τηε ρουτε πρεφερενχε. (Σεε “Σταρτινγ ρουτε γυιδανχε” ον παγε 60.) Ιφ τηε σαµε αδδρεσσ εξιστσ ιν µορε τηαν ονε χιτψ, τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 832
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ (β) Σελεχτινγ α χιτψ το σεαρχη ΙΝ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 833
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ ΣΕΛΕΧΤΙΝΓ ΦΡΟΜ ΤΗΕ ΝΕΑΡΕΣΤ 5 ΧΙΤΙΕΣ 1. Τουχη “Νεαρεστ 5 Χιτιεσ”. ΣΕΛΕΧΤΙΝΓ ΦΡΟΜ ΤΗΕ ΛΑΣΤ 5 ΧΙΤΙΕΣ 2. Τουχη τηε βυττον οφ τηε δεσιρεδ χιτψ ναµε φροµ τηε δισπλαψεδ λιστ. Τηε χυρρεντ σχρεεν χηανγεσ το τηε σχρεεν φορ ινπυττινγ α ηουσε νυµβερ ορ α στρεετ ναµε. (Σεε “(α) Ινπυττινγ α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 834
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ — ∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 835
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ D Σελεχτινγ α χιτψ το σεαρχη Τουχη τηε βυττον οφ τηε δεσιρεδ δεσ− τινατιον. Ιφ τηε σαµε ναµε εξιστσ ιν µορε τηαν ονε χιτψ, α σεαρχη χαν βε περφορµεδ µορε εασι− λψ ωιτη “Χιτψ” ανδ “Χατεγορψ”. (Σεε “Σε− λεχτινγ α χιτψ το σεαρχη” ον παγε 48 ανδ “Σελεχτινγ φροµ τηε χατεγοριεσ” ον - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 836
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ ΙΝ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 837
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ ΣΕΛΕΧΤΙΝΓ ΦΡΟΜ ΤΗΕ ΛΑΣΤ 5 ΧΙΤΙΕΣ D Σελεχτινγ φροµ τηε χατεγοριεσ Τουχη τηε βυττον οφ τηε δεσιρεδ χιτψ ναµε. Ιφ τηε ναϖιγατιον ηασ νεϖερ βεεν υσεδ, νο χιτιεσ ωιλλ βε δισπλαψεδ ον τηε σχρεεν. Τουχη “Χατεγορψ”. Ιφ τηε δεσιρεδ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 838
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ (β) Σεαρχη βψ “Χατεγορψ” Τηε δεστινατιον χαν βε σετ βψ σελεχτινγ τηε σεαρχη ποιντ ανδ τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 839
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ ΣΕΤΤΙΝΓ ΤΗΕ ΧΥΡΡΕΝΤ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 840
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ D Το σεαρχη - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 841
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ — ∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 842
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ — ∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ “Μεµορψ” 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 843
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ — ∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ “Μαπ” D ∆ελετινγ πρεϖιουσ ποιντσ 1. Τουχη “∆ελετε” φορ τηε πρεϖιουσ ποιντ βυττον ψου ωαντ το δελετε. “∆ελετε Αλλ”: Το δελετε αλλ πρεϖιουσ ποιντσ ιν τηε σψστεµ. 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 844
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ — ∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ “Ιντερσεχτιον” 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 845
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ — ∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ “Φρεεωαψ Εντ./Εξιτ” 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 846
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ — ∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ “Χοορδινατεσ” 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 847
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ Σταρτινγ ρουτε γυιδανχε 5. Ιφ µορε τηαν ονε δεστινατιον ισ σετ, τουχη “ΟΚ” αφτερ δελετινγ τηε δεστινα− τιονσ. Τηε σψστεµ σεαρχηεσ φορ τηε γυιδανχε ρουτε αγαιν, ανδ δισπλαψσ τηε εντιρε ρουτε. Αφτερ ινπυττινγ τηε δεστινατιον, τηε σχρεεν χηανγεσ ανδ δισπλαψσ τηε µαπ λοχατιον οφ τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 848
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ ΙΝΦΟΡΜΑΤΙΟΝ D Γυιδανχε χαν βε συσπενδεδ ορ ρε− συµεδ. (Σεε “Συσπενδινγ ανδ ρε− συµινγ γυιδανχε” ον παγε 88.) D Ιφ “Γυιδε” ισ τουχηεδ υντιλ α βεεπ σουνδσ, δεµο µοδε ωιλλ σταρτ. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 849
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ D Το χηανγε τηε ρουτε βεφορε σταρτινγ γυιδανχε ΡΟΥΤΕ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 850
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ 1 2 3 4 5 Τιµε νεχεσσαρψ φορ τηε εντιρε τριπ ∆ιστανχε οφ τηε εντιρε τριπ Τολλ ροαδ Φρεεωαψ Φερρψ 63 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 851
∆ΕΣΤΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ ΣΕΑΡΧΗ 64 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 852
ROUTE GUIDANCE SECTION ROUTE GUIDANCE D Ρουτε γυιδανχε σχρεεν D Τψπιχαλ ϖοιχε γυιδανχε προµπτσ D ∆ιστανχε ανδ τιµε το δεστινατιον D Σεττινγ ανδ δελετινγ δεστινατιον Αδδινγ δεστινατιονσ ...Ρεορδερινγ δεστινατιονσ ...∆ελετινγ δεστινατιονσ ...D Σεττινγ ρουτε Σεαρχη χονδιτιον ...∆ετουρ σεττινγ ...Ρουτε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 853
name Distance and travel/arrival time to the destination Current position Guidance route 1 2 3 4 5 INFORMATION D If the vehicle goes off the guidance route, the route is searched again. D For some areas, the roads have not been completely digitized in our database. For this reason, the route - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 854
ROUTE GUIDANCE D When approaching a freeway exit or junction D When approaching an intersection Road/area name 2 Distance from the current position to the exit or junction 3 Current position "OFF MAP/VOICE 1 Next street name Distance to the intersection 3 Current - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 855
ROUTE GUIDANCE D Other screens TURN LIST SCREEN ARROW SCREEN 1 1 2 3 4 Next street name or destination name Turn direction Distance between turns Current street name 2 3 4 Exit number, street name containing number or next street name Turn direction Distance to the next turn Current street - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 856
ROUTE GUIDANCE Typical voice guidance prompts 4.2 µιλεσ 0.25 µιλεσ 4.7 µιλεσ 0.25 1 4 3 3 2 1 2 5 3 4 5 3 4 INFORMATION On freeways, interstates or other highways with higher speed limits, the voice guidance will be made at earlier points than on city streets in order - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 857
ROUTE GUIDANCE 50 φεετ (15 164 φεετ (50 1 ∗: 1 2 2 3 INFORMATION D If the system cannot determine the current vehicle position correctly (in cases of poor GPS signal reception), the voice guidance may be made early or - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 858
the vehicle is on the guidance route, the distance measured along the route is displayed. Travel time and arrival time is calculated based on the set vehicle speed information. (See page 107.) However, when the vehicle is not on the guidance route, the distance is the linear distance between the - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 859
destinations 1. Touch "Route". 1. Touch "Route". 2. Touch "Add". 3. Input an additional destination in the same way as the destination search 39.) 2. Touch "Reorder". 4. Touch the desired "Add" to determine the arrival order of the additional destination. 3. Select the destination - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 860
ROUTE GUIDANCE - Deleting destinations 4. After selecting the destinations, touch "OK OK 1. Touch "Route". 2. Touch "Delete 3. Touch the destination for deletion. "Delete All 73 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 861
ROUTE GUIDANCE Setting route - - Search condition 4. To delete the destination(s), touch "Yes". Ιφ "Yes No 5. If more than one destination is set, touch "OK" after deleting the destinations 1. Touch "Route". 2. Touch "Search Condition". 3. Touch "Quick", "Quick1", "Quick2" or "Short" and - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 862
- Detour setting Ωηιλε τηε ρουτε γυιδανχε ισ οπερατινγ, ψου χαν χηανγε τηε ρουτε το δετουρ αρουνδ α σεχτιον οφ τηε ρουτε ωηερε α δελαψ ισ χαυσεδ βψ ροαδ ρεπαιρσ, ορ αν αχχιδεντ, ετχ. Τηε εντιρε ρουτε φροµ τηε σταρτινγ ποιντ το τηε δεστινατιον ισ δισπλαψεδ. "Guide": Το σταρτ γυιδανχε. "Route - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 863
Select the button below to select the desired detour distance. "1 mile (km)", "3 miles (km)" or "5 miles (km Whole Route Around Traffic r r 116. 1 2 INFORMATION D When your vehicle is on a freeway, the detour distance selections are 5, 15, and 25 miles (km). D The system may not be able - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 864
1. Touch "Route". 1. Touch "Route". 2. Touch "Route Preference" to change the conditions that determine the route to the destination. 2. Touch "Start from Adjacent Road 3. Select the desired route preference by touching the button 4. After choosing the desired route preference, touch "OK". 77 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 865
ROUTE GUIDANCE Map view - - Display POI icons D Selecting POIs to be displayed Υπ το 5 1. Touch "Map View". 2. Touch "Display POI Icon" to display a particular type of Point of Interest on the screen. Touch the desired Point of Interest category to display POI location symbols on the map - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 866
ROUTE GUIDANCE Touch "Other POIs" on the "Display POI icons" screen Select the desired POI categories from the list OK More". Select the desired POI categories OK List All Categories 79 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 867
ROUTE GUIDANCE D To display the local POI list 20 32 D To set a POI as a destination 1. Touch "Local POI List" on the "Display POI icons" screen. 2. Touch the button of the desired Point of Interest On Route 1. Directly touch the Point of Interest icon that you want to set as a - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 868
σηουλδ τυρν ατ αν ιντερσεχτιον. Touch "Map" on the "Turn List" screen. Τηε ποιντ ωηιχη ψου χηοοσε ισ δισπλαψεδ ον τηε µαπ σχρεεν. Τηε εντιρε ρουτε φροµ τηε χυρρεντ ποσιτιον το τηε δεστινατιον ισ δισπλαψεδ. "Guide": Το σταρτ γυιδανχε. "Route": Το χηανγε τηε ρουτε. (Σεε παγεσ 72 ανδ 74.) "Turn List - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 869
ROUTE GUIDANCE - Route preview : Το ινδιχατε τηε νεξτ δεστινατιον. : Το πρεϖιεω τηε ρουτε το τηε νεξτ δεστινατιον. : Το πρεϖιεω τηε ρουτε το τηε νεξτ δεστινατιον ιν φαστ!φορωαρδ µοδε. : Το στοπ τηε πρεϖιεω. : Το ρεϖιεω τηε ρουτε το τηε πρεϖιουσ δεστινατιον ορ σταρτινγ ποιντ. : Το ρεϖιεω τηε ρουτε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 870
ROUTE GUIDANCE - Route trace 124 200 INFORMATION This feature is available on the map with more detailed map scale than 30 mile (50 km). "Record Stop Stop Touch "Map View". Yes No 83 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 871
ROUTE GUIDANCE 84 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 872
SECTION D D D D D 4 86 87 88 89 90 D 92 93 94 99 100 101 101 102 105 106 D Σετυπ 106 D ΞΜr 116 85 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 873
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Θυιχκ ρεφερενχε (“Μενυ” σχρεεν) Τηε “Μενυ” σχρεεν αλλοωσ εφφεχτιϖε υσε οφ τηε ναϖιγατιον σψστεµ. Το δισπλαψ τηε “Μενυ” σχρεεν, πυση τηε “ΜΕΝΥ” βυττον. “Συσπενδ Γυιδανχε” ανδ “Ρε− συµε Γυιδανχε” Συσπενδσ ορ ρεσυµεσ γυιδανχε...88 2 “ςολυµε” Σετσ τηε ϖολυµε φορ ϖοιχε γυιδανχε...89 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 874
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Θυιχκ ρεφερενχε (“Σετυπ” σχρεεν) Τηε ιτεµσ σηοων ον τηε “Σετυπ” σχρεεν χαν βε σετ. Το δισπλαψ τηε “Σετυπ” σχρεεν, πυση τηε “ΜΕΝΥ” βυττον ανδ τουχη “Σετυπ”. 1 “Υνιτ οφ Μεασυρεµεντ” Τηε διστανχε υνιτσ “κµ” ορ “µιλεσ” χαν βε σελεχτεδ...107 2 “Εστιµατεδ Τραϖελ Τιµε” Τηε σψστεµ το - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 875
9 112 10 113 11 113 12 114 13 106 14 27 D 1 2 INFORMATION Without route guidance, "Suspend Guidance" cannot be used. 88 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 876
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ςολυµε D Το ρεσυµε γυιδανχε 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 877
INFORMATION During route guidance, the voice guidance continues even if the navigation screen is changed to other screens 50 µπη (80 D D D D D Σετυπ D D D D D D D 1 2 90 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 878
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Το ρεγιστερ D Το χηανγε υσερ 1. Τουχη “Μεµοριζε”. Τηε χονφιρµατιον σχρεεν ωιλλ βε δισπλαψεδ. Τουχη “Υσερ νυµβερ”. Τηε αβοϖε µεσσαγε αππεαρσ, τηεν τηε µαπ σχρεεν ωιλλ βε δισπλαψεδ. 2. Το ρεγιστερ, τουχη “Ψεσ”. Το ρετυρν το τηε πρεϖιουσ σχρεεν, τουχη “Νο” ορ . Ωηεν α βυττον - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 879
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Μψ πλαχεσ — D Το δελετε υσερ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 880
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Ρεγιστερινγ µεµορψ ποιντσ 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 881
1 2 5 94. INFORMATION Up to 106 memory points can be registered. 3 4 94 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 882
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Το χηανγε “Ιχον” 1. Τουχη “Ιχον” ον τηε “Μεµορψ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 883
1 D 42 42.) 1 2 2 3 INFORMATION One "Home" and five "Quick Access" can be set. 96 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 884
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ∆ΕΛΕΤΙΝΓ “Θυιχκ Αχχεσσ” D Το χηανγε “Ναµε” 1. Τουχη “Ναµε” ον τηε “Μεµορψ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 885
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ∆ΙΣ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 886
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — ∆ελετινγ µεµορψ ποιντσ D Το χηανγε “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 887
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Ρεγιστερινγ ηοµε Ιφ ηοµε ηασ βεεν ρεγιστερεδ, τηατ ινφορµα− τιον χαν βε ρεχαλλεδ βψ υσινγ τηε “Ηοµε” τουχη!σχρεεν βυττον ον τηε “∆εστινατιον” σχρεεν. (Σεε “ — ∆εστινατιον σεαρχη βψ Ηοµε” ον παγε 42.) 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 888
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — ∆ελετινγ ηοµε 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 889
1 2 7 8 INFORMATION D If a destination is input in the area to avoid or the route calculation cannot already registered, the following message will be displayed: "Unable to register additional points. Perform operation again after deleting unnecessary points.". 3 4 102 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 890
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Το χηανγε “Ναµε” 1. Τουχη “Ναµε” ον τηε “Εδιτ Αρεα το Αϖοιδ” σχρεεν. 5. Τουχη τηε βυττον το βε εδιτεδ. “Ναµε”: Το εδιτ τηε ναµε οφ τηε αρεα το αϖοιδ. Τηε ναµεσ χαν βε δισπλαψεδ ον τηε µαπ. (Σεε παγε 103.) “Λοχατιον”: Το εδιτ αρεα λοχατιον. (Σεε παγε 104.) “Αρεα Σιζε”: Το εδιτ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 891
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ∆ΙΣ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 892
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — ∆ελετινγ αρεα το αϖοιδ D Το χηανγε “Αρεα Σιζε” 1. Τουχη “Αρεα Σιζε” ον τηε “Εδιτ Αρεα το Αϖοιδ” σχρεεν. 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 893
1 2 Σετυπ 87.) 3 1 4 2 3 5 4 INFORMATION To reset all setup items, touch "Default". 106 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 894
D 1 2 D 1 2 3 4 3 INFORMATION This function is available only in English or Spanish. To switch language, see "Selecting a language" on page 199. 4 5 107 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 895
INFORMATION D The displayed time to the destination is the approximate driving time that is calculated based on the selected speeds and the actual position along the guidance route. D The time shown on the screen may vary greatly depending on progress along the route, which may be affected by road - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 896
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΛΑΨΟΥΤ ΤΨ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 897
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 898
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D ∆ισπλαψ οφ βυιλδινγ σηαπε Ωηεν τηε “∆ισπλαψ Βυιλδινγ Σηαπεσ” φεα− τυρε ισ τυρνεδ ον, τηε σψστεµ ωιλλ δισπλαψ τηε βυιλδινγ σηαπε ον τηε µαπ σχρεεν υσινγ α σχαλε οφ 150 φεετ (50 µ) το 300 φεετ (100 µ). Το τυρν τηε “∆ισπλαψ Βυιλδινγ Σηαπεσ” ον: 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 899
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D ςοιχε ρεχογνιτιον γυιδανχε Ωηεν τηε “ςοιχε Ρεχογνιτιον Γυιδανχε” φεατυρε ισ τυρνεδ ον, τηε ϖοιχε ρεχογνιτιον γυιδανχε χαν βε ηεαρδ αυτοµατιχαλλψ. Το τυρν τηε “ςοιχε Ρεχογνιτιον Γυιδανχε” ον: 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 900
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Αυτο ϖοιχε γυιδανχε Ωηεν τηε “Αυτο ςοιχε Γυιδανχε” φεατυρε ισ τυρνεδ ον, τηε ϖοιχε γυιδανχε χαν βε ηεαρδ αυτοµατιχαλλψ. Ωηεν τηε “Αυτο ςοιχε Γυιδανχε” φεατυρε ισ τυρνεδ οφφ, τηε ϖοιχε γυιδανχε χαν βε ηεαρδ ονλψ ιφ τηε “ΜΑ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 901
D 1 2 3 0.5 800 µ). 3 4 INFORMATION For additional information on the accuracy of a current vehicle position, see "Limitations of the navigation system" on page 202. 114 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 902
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 903
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΞΜr ΝαϖΤραφφιχ (ΥΣΑ ονλψ) ΤΙΡΕ ΧΗΑΝΓΕ ΧΑΛΙΒΡΑΤΙΟΝ Τηε τιρε χηανγε χαλιβρατιον φυνχτιον ωιλλ βε υσεδ ωηεν ρεπλαχινγ τηε τιρεσ. Τηισ φυνχ− τιον ωιλλ αδϕυστ τηε µισχαλχυλατιον χαυσεδ βψ τηε χιρχυµφερενχε διφφερενχε βετωεεν τηε ολδ ανδ νεω τιρεσ. Ιφ τηισ προχεδυρε ισ νοτ περφορµεδ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 904
1 1 r 118.) 2 119.) 3 120.) 4 120.) INFORMATION When "OFF" for "Show XM NavTraffic Information" is selected, "Auto Avoid Traffic", "Traffic Voice Guidance" and "Show Free Flowing Traffic" will not operate. 2 117 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 905
r r 1 ΞΜr r r 119.) INFORMATION When the XMr NavTraffic icon is touched, voice guidance for the traffic information will start even if "OFF" for "Traffic Voice Guidance" is selected 2 ΞΜr r r 118 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 906
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ 3 ΞΜr ΝαϖΤραφφιχ ινδιχατορ Ωηεν ανψ ΞΜr ΝαϖΤραφφιχ ινφορµατιον ηασ βεεν ρεχειϖεδ, τηε ΞΜr ΝαϖΤραφφιχ ινδιχα− τορ ωιλλ αππεαρ ον τηε σχρεεν. Τηε χολορ οφ τηε ινδιχατορ χηανγεσ δεπενδινγ ον τηε τραφφιχ ινφορµατιον ρεχειϖεδ. “Ωηιτε”: Τραφφιχ ινφορµατιον ηασ βεεν ρε− χειϖεδ. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 907
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ (χ) Τραφφιχ ςοιχε Γυιδανχε Ψου χαν ρεχειϖε χονγεστιον ινφορµατιον τηρουγη ϖοιχε γυιδανχε ωηιλε βεινγ γυιδεδ το ψουρ δεστινατιον. (δ) Σηοω Φρεε Φλοωινγ Τραφφιχ Φρεελψ φλοωινγ τραφφιχ ισ σηοων ωιτη τηε αρ− ροω. Τουχη “ΟΝ” οφ τηε “Τραφφιχ ςοιχε Γυιδ− ανχε”. Τουχη “ΟΝ” οφ τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 908
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ (ε) ΞΜr ΝαϖΤραφφιχ τεξτ ινφορµατιον Ωηεν ψου τουχη τηε ΞΜr ΝαϖΤραφφιχ ιχον ον τηε µαπ, τηε ΞΜr ΝαϖΤραφφιχ ινφο. βαρ ωιλλ αππεαρ ον τηε υππερ παρτ οφ τηε σχρεεν. 1. Τουχη “Ινφο.” το δισπλαψ τηε “Τραφφιχ Ινφορµατιον” σχρεεν. 2. Τουχη “∆εταιλ” το δισπλαψ δεταιλεδ τραφφιχ εϖεντ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 909
Α∆ςΑΝΧΕ∆ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ 122 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 910
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΣΕΧΤΙΟΝ ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Μαιντενανχε ινφορµατιον Μαιντενανχε ινφορµατιον σεττινγ ...∆εαλερ σεττινγ ...D Χαλενδαρ ωιτη µεµο Αδδινγ α µεµο ...Εδιτινγ α µεµο ...Μεµο λιστ ...D Ηανδσ!φρεε σψστεµ (φορ χελλυλαρ πηονε) Εντερ α Βλυετοοτηr πηονε ...Χαλλ ον τηε Βλυετοοτηr πηονε ...Ρεχειϖε ον - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 911
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Μαιντενανχε ινφορµατιον — — Μαιντενανχε ινφορµατιον σεττινγ Ωηεν τηε ναϖιγατιον σψστεµ ισ τυρνεδ ον, τηε “Ινφορµατιον” σχρεεν δισπλαψσ ωηεν ιτ ισ τιµε το ρεπλαχε α παρτ ορ χερταιν χοµπο− νεντσ. (Σεε παγε 22.) 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 912
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΙΝΦΟΡΜΑΤΙΟΝ ΙΤΕΜΣ “ΕΝΓΙΝΕ ΟΙΛ”: Ρεπλαχε ενγινε οιλ “ΟΙΛ ΦΙΛΤΕΡ”: Ρεπλαχε ενγινε οιλ φιλτερ “ΡΟΤΑΤΙΟΝ”: Ροτατε τιρεσ “ΤΙΡΕΣ”: Ρεπλαχε τιρεσ “ΒΑΤΤΕΡΨ”: Ρεπλαχε βαττερψ “ΒΡΑΚΕ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 913
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — ∆εαλερ σεττινγ Ιτ ισ ποσσιβλε το ρεγιστερ α δεαλερ ιν τηε σψσ− τεµ. Ωιτη δεαλερ ινφορµατιον ρεγιστερεδ, ρουτε γυιδανχε το τηε δεαλερ ισ αϖαιλαβλε. 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 914
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Το εδιτ “∆εαλερ” ορ “Χονταχτ” 1. Τουχη “∆εαλερ” ορ “Χονταχτ” ον τηε “Εδιτ ∆εαλερ” σχρεεν. D Το εδιτ “Λοχατιον” 1. Τουχη “Λοχατιον” ον τηε “Εδιτ ∆εαλ− ερ” σχρεεν. 2. Εντερ τηε ναµε υσινγ τηε αλπηανυ− µεριχ κεψσ. Υπ το 24 λεττερσ χαν βε εντερεδ. 3. Τουχη “ΟΚ”. Τηε πρεϖιουσ σχρεεν - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 915
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Χαλενδαρ ωιτη µεµο — D Το εδιτ “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 916
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Ον τηισ σχρεεν, τηε χυρρεντ δατε ισ ηιγη− λιγητεδ ιν ψελλοω. ορ ορ : Το χηανγε µοντη. : Το χηανγε ψεαρ. “Τοδαψ”: Το δισπλαψ τηε χυρρεντ µοντη χαλ− ενδαρ (ιφ ανοτηερ µοντη ωιλλ βε δισπλαψεδ). “Λιστ”: Το δισπλαψ τηε λιστ οφ ρεγιστερεδ µε− µοσ. (Σεε “ — Μεµο λιστ” ον παγε 131.) - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 917
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Αδδινγ α µεµο Ιφ α µεµο ισ αδδεδ, τηε σψστεµ ινφορµσ οφ τηε µεµο εντρψ ωηεν τηε σψστεµ ισ σταρτεδ ον τηε µεµο δατε. (Σεε παγε 23.) 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 918
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Εδιτινγ α µεµο Τηε ρεγιστερεδ µεµο χαν βε εδιτεδ. 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 919
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Το δισπλαψ µεµοσ φορ α σπεχιφιεδ πε− ριοδ οφ τιµε 1. Τουχη “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 920
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Ηανδσ!φρεε σψστεµ (φορ χελλυλαρ πηονε) Ηανδσ!φρεε σψστεµ αλλοωσ ψου το µακε ορ ρεχειϖε α χαλλ ωιτηουτ τακινγ ψουρ ηανδσ οφφ τηε στεερινγ ωηεελ. Τηισ σψστεµ συππορτσ Βλυετοοτηr. Βλυετοοτηr ισ α ωιρελεσσ δατα σψστεµ βψ ωηιχη ψου χαν χαλλ ωιτηουτ ψουρ χελλυλαρ πηονε βεινγ χοννεχτεδ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 921
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΙΝΦΟΡΜΑΤΙΟΝ D Ταλκ αλτερνατελψ ωιτη τηε οτηερ παρτψ ον τηε πηονε. Ιφ ψου ταλκ ατ τηε σαµε τιµε, τηε ϖοιχε µαψ νοτ ρεαχη εαχη οτηερ. (Ιτ ισ νοτ α µαλφυνχτιον.) D Κεεπ τηε ϖολυµε οφ ρεχειϖινγ ϖοιχε λοω σο τηατ αν εχηο ισ νοτ ηεαρδ. Ωηεν ψου ταλκ ον τηε πηονε, σπεακ χλεαρλψ τοωαρδσ τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 922
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ 4 Ινδιχατεσ τηε λεϖελ οφ ρεχεπτιον. Τοο βαδ Εξχελλεντ “Νο χοννεχτιον” ινδιχατεσ νο πηονε ισ χοννεχτεδ το τηε σψστεµ. “Νο σερϖιχε” ινδιχατεσ ψου αρε νοτ ιν τηε σερϖιχε αρεα. Τηε λεϖελ οφ ρεχεπτιον δοεσ νοτ αλωαψσ χορ− ρεσπονδ ωιτη τηε ονε ον ψουρ χελλυλαρ πηονε. ΙΝΦΟΡΜΑΤΙΟΝ Τηισ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 923
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Εντερ α Βλυετοοτηr πηονε ΦΧΧ Ι∆: ΒΑΒΒΤ016Α ΙΧ Ι∆: 2024Β!ΒΤ016Α ΜΑ∆Ε ΙΝ ϑΑ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 924
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Ρεγιστερινγ ψουρ πηονε Ιφ νο πηονε ηασ βεεν ρεγιστερεδ, τηισ σχρεεν ωιλλ βε δισπλαψεδ. 1. Τουχη “Ψεσ” το ρεγιστερ ψουρ πηονε. Ιφ ψου τουχη “Νο”, τηε “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 925
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Ρεγιστερινγ µορε τηαν ονε πηονε Ψου χαν ρεγιστερ υπ το 6 πηονεσ ιν τηε σψσ− τεµ. 1. Τουχη “Σεττινγσ” το δισπλαψ τηε “Σεττινγσ” σχρεεν. Ιφ ανψ ρεγιστερεδ πηονε ισ χοννεχτεδ, τηισ σχρεεν ωιλλ βε δισπλαψεδ. 4. Τουχη “Ψεσ” το ρεγιστερ ψουρ νεω πηονε. 2. Τουχη “Βλυετοοτη∗” το - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 926
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Χοννεχτινγ α Βλυετοοτηr πηονε ΑΥΤΟΜΑΤΙΧΑΛΛΨ 6. Ωηεν τηε χοννεχτιον ισ χοµπλετεδ, τηισ σχρεεν ισ δισπλαψεδ. Ψου δο νοτ νεεδ το ρεγιστερ τηε πηονε ιφ τηε πηονε ηασ αλρεαδψ βεεν ρεγιστερεδ το ψουρ ϖεηιχλε. Ωηεν ψου ρεγιστερ ψουρ πηονε, αυτο χοννεχτιον ωιλλ βε τυρνεδ ον. Αλωαψσ σετ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 927
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΜΑΝΥΑΛΛΨ Ωηεν τηε αυτο χοννεχτιον φαιλεδ ορ τυρνεδ οφφ, ψου ηαϖε το χοννεχτ Βλυετοοτηr µανυαλλψ. Τουχη “Χοννεχτ” αφτερ ηαϖινγ εναβλεδ τηε Βλυετοοτηr χοννεχτιον ον τηε πηονε. τηε Βλυετοοτηr πηονε Ιφ τηε Βλυετοοτηr πηονε ισ δισχον− νεχτεδ ωιτη α ποορ ρεχεπτιον φροµ τηε Βλυετοοτηr - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 928
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Χαλλ ον τηε Βλυετοοτηr πηονε Αφτερ ψου ρεγιστερ τηε Βλυετοοτηr πηονε, ψου χαν χαλλ βψ υσινγ τηε ηανδσ!φρεε σψστεµ. Ψου χαν χαλλ υσινγ τηε 7 µετηοδσ δεσχριβεδ βελοω. D ∆ιαλ (Σεε παγε 141.) D - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 929
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Βψ πηονε βοοκ Ψου χαν χαλλ βψ πηονε βοοκ δατα ωηιχη ισ τρανσφερρεδ φροµ ψουρ χελλυλαρ πηονε. Τηε σψστεµ ηασ ονε πηονε βοοκ. Ψου χαν ρεγιστερ υπ το 1000 νυµβερσ. Τηισ χαννοτ βε οπερατεδ ωηιλε δριϖινγ. ΤΡΑΝΣΦΕΡ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 930
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ 3. Τρανσφερ τηε πηονε βοοκ δατα το τηε σψστεµ υσινγ τηε Βλυετοοτηr πηονε. Τηισ σχρεεν αππεαρσ ωηιλε τρανσφερρινγ. Το χανχελ ιτ, τουχη “Χανχελ”. Ιφ τηε τρανσφερ− ρινγ ισ ιντερρυπτεδ, τηε πηονε βοοκ δατα τρανσφερρεδ υντιλ τηεν χαν βε µεµοριζεδ ιν τηε σψστεµ. Ωηεν τηεσε σχρεενσ αρε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 931
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΧΑΛΛ ΒΨ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 932
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Βψ διαλεδ νυµβερσ Ψου χαν χαλλ βψ διαλεδ νυµβερ. Τηε σψσ− τεµ µεµοριζεσ υπ το 5 διαλεδ νυµβερσ. Ιφ ιτ ισ µορε τηαν 5, τηε ολδεστ νυµβερ ισ δελετεδ. Τηισ χαννοτ βε οπερατεδ ωηιλε δριϖινγ. D Ωηεν ψου χαλλ βψ πηονε βοοκ, τηε ναµε (ιφ ρεγιστερεδ) ισ δισπλαψεδ. D Ωηεν ψου χαλλ τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 933
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Βψ ρεχειϖεδ χαλλσ Ψου χαν χαλλ βψ ρεχειϖεδ χαλλσ. Ωηεν α χαλλ ισ ρεχειϖεδ, τηε σψστεµ µεµοριζεσ υπ το 5 νυµβερσ. Ιφ ιτ ισ µορε τηαν 5, τηε ολδεστ νυµβερ ισ δελετεδ. Τηισ χαννοτ βε οπερατεδ ωηιλε δριϖινγ. D Ωηεν α τελεπηονε νυµβερ ρεγιστερεδ ιν πηονε βοοκ ισ ρεχειϖεδ, τηε ναµε ανδ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 934
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Βψ σπεεδ διαλ Ψου χαν χαλλ βψ ρεγιστερεδ τελεπηονε νυµβερ ωηιχη ψου σελεχτεδ φροµ α πηονε βοοκ. (Σεε “(α) Ρεγιστερινγ τηε σπεεδ διαλ” ον παγε 155 φορ ρεγιστερινγ τηε σπεεδ διαλ.) “Αδδ το - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 935
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Βψ ϖοιχε ρεχογνιτιον Ψου χαν χαλλ βψ γιϖινγ α χοµµανδ. (Φορ τηε οπερατιον ανδ χοµµανδ οφ ϖοιχε ρεχογνιτιον, σεε “Σπεεχη χοµµανδ σψστεµ” ον παγε 188 ανδ “Ηελπ σχρεεν” ον παγε 191.) ∆ΙΑΛΙΝΓ ΒΨ ΝΑΜΕ Ψου χαν χαλλ βψ γιϖινγ α ϖοιχε ταγ ρεγισ− τερεδ ιν τηε πηονε βοοκ. Φορ σεττινγ τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 936
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ∆ΙΑΛΙΝΓ ΒΨ ΝΥΜΒΕΡ Ψου χαν χαλλ βψ γιϖινγ α δεσιρεδ νυµ− βερ. “Νεξτ” ισ δισπλαψεδ ωηεν µυλτιπλε εντριεσ αρε φουνδ φορ α σεαρχηεδ ναµε. Υπ το 6 εντριεσ χαν βε δισπλαψεδ ινχλυδινγ τηε φιρστ σεαρχηεδ ονε. ∆ο τηε φολλοωινγ το χηανγε τηε εντρψ το τηε νεξτ ονε. D Τουχη “Νεξτ”. D - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 937
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΧΑΛΛ ΒΑΧΚ Ψου χαν χαλλ βψ ρεχειϖεδ χαλλσ. Υπ το 5 νυµβερσ αρε µεµοριζεδ ιν τηε σψστεµ. ΡΕ∆ΙΑΛ Ψου χαν χαλλ βψ διαλεδ νυµβερσ. Υπ το 5 νυµβερσ αρε µεµοριζεδ ιν τηε σψσ− τεµ. Σψστεµ: Ψου: Σψστεµ: Ψου: Σψστεµ: Ψου: Σψστεµ: Ψου: Σψστεµ: “Τηε µοστ ρεχεντ ινχοµινγ χαλλ ωασ 812387. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 938
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΣΕΝ∆ΙΝΓ Α ΤΟΝΕ Ψου χαν σενδ α τονε βψ γιϖινγ α δεσιρεδ νυµβερ δυρινγ α χαλλ. D Βψ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 939
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Ρεχειϖε ον τηε Βλυετοοτη r πηονε — Ταλκ ον τηε Βλυετοοτηr πηονε Ωηεν α χαλλ ισ ρεχειϖεδ, τηισ σχρεεν ισ δισπλαψεδ ωιτη α σουνδ. Τουχη ορ πυση ον τηε στεερινγ ωηεελ το ταλκ ον τηε πηονε. Το ηανγ υπ τηε πηονε: Τουχη ορ πυση ον τηε στεερινγ ωηεελ αγαιν. Το ρεφυσε το ρεχειϖε τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 940
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Σενδινγ α τονε D Σενδινγ α ρεγιστερεδ χοντινυουσ τονε Τουχη τηε δεσιρεδ νυµβερ το σενδ α τονε. Το ηανγ υπ τηε πηονε: Τουχη ορ πυση ον τηε στεερινγ ωηεελ. Τηισ χαννοτ βε οπερατεδ ωηιλε δριϖινγ. Ωηεν ψου χαλλ βψ α πηονε βοοκ ανδ ιφ τηε χοντινυουσ τονε σιγναλ ισ ρεγιστερεδ ιν α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 941
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Ρεγιστερινγ ανδ δελετινγ πηονε νυµβερσ D Σενδινγ α τονε βψ τηε σπεεδ τονε Ψου χαν σενδ α τονε βψ τηε σπεεδ τονε. (Φορ ρεγιστερινγ τηε σπεεδ τονε, σεε “(β) Ρεγιστερινγ τηε σπεεδ τονε” ον παγε 158.) Ψου χαν ρεγιστερ πηονε νυµβερσ ιν τηε πηονε βοοκ ανδ σπεεδ διαλ. Τηε ρεγισ− τερεδ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 942
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ (α) Ρεγιστερινγ τηε σπεεδ διαλ Ψου χαν ρεγιστερ τηε δεσιρεδ τελεπηονε νυµβερ φροµ πηονε βοοκ. Υπ το 17 σπεεδ διαλ νυµβερσ χαν βε ρεγιστερεδ. Τηε 6τη εντρψ ισ τηε σπεεδ διαλ φορ ρεδιαλινγ. 4. Σελεχτ τηε δατα ψου ωαντ το ρεγιστερ. 1. Τουχη “Σπεεδ ∆ιαλ”. 5. Τουχη τηε δεσιρεδ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 943
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Ψου χαν αλσο ρεγιστερ δατα το τηε σπεεδ διαλ. Ιφ ψου σελεχτ α τουχη!σχρεεν βυττον ψου ρεγιστερεδ βεφορε, τηισ σχρεεν ισ δισ− πλαψεδ. 7. Τουχη “Ψεσ” ιφ ψου ωαντ το ρεπλαχε ιτ. 1. Τουχη “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 944
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D ∆ελετινγ τηε σπεεδ διαλ ινδιϖιδυαλλψ Ψου χαν δελετε “01” ! “17” οφ τηε σπεεδ διαλ ινδιϖιδυαλλψ. Ιφ ψου δελετε τηεµ αλλ ατ ονχε, αλλ οφ 17 νυµ− βερσ αρε δελετεδ. 4. Τουχη τηε τουχη!σχρεεν βυττον ψου ωαντ το ρεγιστερ ιν. Τηε λατεστ διαλεδ νυµβερ ισ ρεγιστερεδ ιν τηε 6τη ιτεµ (σπεεδ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 945
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D ∆ελετινγ αλλ οφ τηε σπεεδ διαλ (β) Ρεγιστερινγ τηε σπεεδ τονε Ψου χαν ρεγιστερ τηε δεσιρεδ τονε νυµ− βερ. Υπ το 6 σπεεδ τονε νυµβερσ χαν βε ρεγιστερεδ. 1. Τουχη “∆ελετε Αλλ” οφ “Σπεεδ ∆ιαλ”. 1. Τουχη “Χρεατε” οφ “Σπεεδ Τονε”. 2. Τουχη “Ψεσ”. 2. Υσε τηε σοφτωαρε κεψβοαρδ το - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 946
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Εδιτινγ τηε σπεεδ τονε Ψου χαν εδιτ τηε σπεεδ τονε. 3. Ινπυτ τηε νυµβερ ανδ τουχη “ΟΚ”. 1. Τουχη “Εδιτ” οφ “Σπεεδ Τονε”. 4. Τουχη τηε δεσιρεδ τουχη!σχρεεν βυττον ψου ωαντ το ρεγιστερ ιν. 2. Τουχη τηε τουχη!σχρεεν βυττον ψου ωαντ το εδιτ. Ιφ ψου σελεχτ α τουχη!σχρεεν βυττον ψου - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 947
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D ∆ελετινγ τηε σπεεδ τονε ινδιϖιδυαλλψ Ψου χαν δελετε “1” το “6” οφ τηε σπεεδ τονε. Ιφ ψου δελετε τηεµ αλλ ατ ονχε, αλλ οφ 6 νυµ− βερσ αρε δελετεδ. 3. Υσε τηε σοφτωαρε κεψβοαρδ το ινπυτ τηε ναµε ανδ τουχη “ΟΚ”. 1. Τουχη “∆ελετε” οφ “Σπεεδ Τονε”. 4. Ινπυτ τηε νυµβερ ανδ τουχη - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 948
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D ∆ελετινγ αλλ τηε σπεεδ τονε (χ) Σεττινγ τηε πηονε βοοκ Ψου χαν ρεγιστερ πηονε νυµβερσ ιν τηε πηονε βοοκ. 1. Τουχη “∆ελετε Αλλ” οφ “Σπεεδ Τονε”. 1. Τουχη “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 949
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Τρανσφερρινγ α τελεπηονε νυµβερ Ψου χαν τρανσφερ τηε τελεπηονε νυµ− βερσ ιν ψουρ Βλυετοοτηr πηονε το τηε σψστεµ. Υπ το 1000 περσον’σ δατα (υπ το 2 νυµβερσ α περσον) χαν βε ρεγιστερεδ ιν τηε πηονε βοοκ. Τρανσφερ ιτ ωηιλε τηε ενγινε ισ ρυννινγ. 4. Τρανσφερ τηε πηονε βοοκ δατα το - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 950
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Ρεγιστερινγ τηε πηονε βοοκ δατα Ψου χαν ρεγιστερ τηε πηονε βοοκ δατα. 1. Τουχη “Αδδ Χονταχτ” οφ “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 951
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Ψου χαν ρεγιστερ τηε χαλλ ηιστορψ δατα ιν τηε πηονε βοοκ. 4. Τουχη τηε δεσιρεδ τουχη!σχρεεν βυττον το εδιτ τηε πηονε βοοκ. 1. Τουχη “Χαλλ Ηιστορψ”. Τηε “Ινχοµινγ Χαλλσ” ορ “Ουτγοινγ Χαλλσ” σχρεεν ωιλλ βε δισπλαψεδ. 2. Σελεχτ τηε δεσιρεδ νυµβερ φροµ τηε λιστ. 5. Ωηεν ψου χοµπλετε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 952
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Ε∆ΙΤΙΝΓ ΤΗΕ ΝΑΜΕ Ωηεν ψου ηαϖε νοτ ινπυτ τηε ναµε, τηε νυµβερ ισ δισπλαψεδ ον τηε λιστ. Ε∆ΙΤΙΝΓ ΤΗΕ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 953
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΣΕΛΕΧΤΙΝΓ ΤΗΕ ΓΡΟΥ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 954
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Εδιτινγ τηε δατα Ψου χαν εδιτ τηε ρεγιστερεδ δατα. 4. Τουχη “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 955
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Ψου χαν αλσο εδιτ τηε δατα ιν τηε φολλοω− ινγ ωαψ. Ψου χαν υπδατε τηε ρεγιστερεδ δατα υσ− ινγ τηε χαλλ ηιστορψ δατα. 1. Τουχη “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 956
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D ∆ελετινγ τηε δατα Ψου χαν δελετε τηε δατα. Ωηεν ψου ρελεασε ποσσεσσιον οφ ψουρ ϖεηιχλε, δελετε αλλ ψουρ δατα ον τηε σψσ− τεµ. 3. Τουχη “Υπδατε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 957
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Ψου χαν αλσο δελετε ιτ ιν τηε φολλοωινγ ωαψ. 4. Τουχη “Ψεσ”. 1. Τουχη “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 958
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D ∆ελετινγ αλλ τηε πηονε δατα ∆ΕΛΕΤΙΝΓ ΓΡΟΥ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 959
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Ρεγιστερινγ α γρουπ ναµε Ψου χαν ρεγιστερ 20 γρουπσ. “Νο Γρουπ”, “Γρουπ 01” ! “Γρουπ 19” αρε ρεγιστερεδ βψ δεφαυλτ. Ψου χαν χηανγε “Γρουπ 01” ! “Γρουπ 19” ιντο δεσιρεδ ναµεσ. ΣΕΛΕΧΤΙΝΓ Α ΓΡΟΥ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 960
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Ε∆ΙΤΙΝΓ Α ΓΡΟΥ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 961
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D ∆ελετινγ αλλ τηε γρουπ ναµε (δ) ∆ελετινγ τηε χαλλ ηιστορψ δατα Ψου χαν δελετε τηε χαλλ ηιστορψ δατα ινδι− ϖιδυαλλψ ορ αλλ ατ ονχε. Ωηεν ψου ρελεασε ποσσεσσιον οφ ψουρ ϖεηιχλε, δελετε αλλ τηε δατα ον τηε σψσ− τεµ. ΙΝ∆ΙςΙ∆ΥΑΛΛΨ 1. Τουχη Ναµε”. “∆ελετε Αλλ” οφ “Γρουπ 1. Τουχη - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 962
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ 4. Τουχη “Ψεσ”. ΑΛΛ ΑΤ ΟΝΧΕ (ε) Σεττινγ τηε σεχυριτψ Ωηεν ψου σετ τηε σεχυριτψ, ψου χαν πρε− ϖεντ πεοπλε φροµ υσινγ σοµε φυνχτιονσ οφ τηε Ηανδσ!φρεε σψστεµ. Ιτ ισ υσεφυλ ωηεν ψου λεαϖε ψουρ χαρ ωιτη τηε ηοτελ ορ ψου δον’τ ωαντ οτηερσ το σεε τηε δατα ψου ρεγιστερεδ. Ωηεν ψου σετ ορ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 963
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Χηανγινγ τηε σεχυριτψ πασσχοδε Τηε σεχυριτψ πασσχοδε ισ 4 διγιτσ ανδ τηε δεφαυλτ ισ “0000”. Χηανγε α νεω πασσχοδε τηατ ισ ηαρδ φορ οτηερ πεοπλε το κνοω. Ωηεν ψου χηανγε τηε σεχυριτψ πασσχοδε, δον’τ φοργετ τηε πασσχοδε. Τηε δεαλερσ χαννοτ υνλοχκ τηε σεχυριτψ ωηεν ψου φοργετ ιτ. Ιφ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 964
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 965
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ — Χηανγινγ τηε σεττινγ οφ τηε Βλυετοοτηr πηονε D Ινιτιαλιζινγ τηε σεχυριτψ σεττινγσ Ψου χαν ινιτιαλιζε τηε σεττινγσ. Τουχη “Σεττινγσ” το δισπλαψ τηε “Σετ− τινγσ” σχρεεν. 1. Τουχη “∆εφαυλτ”. 2. Ινπυτ τηε σεχυριτψ πασσχοδε ανδ τουχη “ΟΚ”. Ψου χαν χηανγε τηε σεττινγσ οφ τηε πηονε. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 966
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ (α) Σεττινγ τηε ϖολυµε D Αυτοµατιχ ϖολυµε σεττινγσ φορ ηιγη σπεεδ Ψου χαν σετ τηε ϖολυµε ονε στεπ υπ ωηεν τηε σπεεδ ισ οϖερ 50 µπη (80 κµ/η). (Ωηεν ιτ ισ υνδερ 43 µπη (70 κµ/η), πρεϖιουσ ϖολυµε ισ βαχκ.) Εαχη τιµε ψου τουχη “Αδαπτιϖε ςολυµε Χοντρολ”, ψου χαν σωιτχη ον ορ οφφ. 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 967
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Ινιτιαλιζινγ τηε σεττινγσ Ψου χαν ινιτιαλιζε τηε σεττινγσ. (β) Σεττινγ τηε σχρεεν 1. Τουχη “∆εφαυλτ”. 1. Τουχη “Σχρεεν” το δισπλαψ τηε “Σχρεεν Σεττινγσ” σχρεεν. 2. Τουχη “Ψεσ”. 2. ∆ο τηε δεταιλ σεττινγσ οφ τηε σχρεεν ανδ τουχη “ΟΚ”. 180 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 968
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Ινχοµινγ χαλλ δισπλαψ µοδε Ψου χαν σελεχτ τηε µετηοδ οφ τηε ρεχειϖ− ινγ χαλλ δισπλαψ. D Αυτο ανσωερ Ωηεν α χαλλ ισ ρεχειϖεδ, τηε δισπλαψ αυ− τοµατιχαλλψ χηανγεσ το τηε ταλκινγ σχρεεν ανδ ψου χαν σταρτ το ταλκ ον τηε πηονε (ωιτηουτ τουχηινγ ανψ βυττον) αφ− τερ τηε πρεσετ τιµε. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 969
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D ∆ισπλαψ πηονε στατυσ D Ινιτιαλιζινγ τηε σεττινγσ Ψου χαν ινιτιαλιζε τηε σεττινγσ. Ωηεν τηε “ΕΝΓΙΝΕ ΣΤΑΡΤ ΣΤΟ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 970
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ (χ) Σελεχτινγ α Βλυετοοτηr πηονε Ιν χασε ψου ρεγιστερ µορε τηαν ονε Βλυετοοτηr πηονε, ψου νεεδ το χηοοσε α φαϖοριτε ονε. 3. Τουχη “ΟΚ”. 1. Τουχη “Σελεχτ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 971
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D ∆ισπλαψινγ Βλυετοοτηr ινφορµατιον Ψου χαν σεε ορ σετ τηε ινφορµατιον οφ τηε Βλυετοοτηr πηονε ον τηε σψστεµ. “∆εϖιχε Ναµε”: Τηε ναµε οφ Βλυετοοτηr πηονε ωηιχη ισ δισπλαψεδ ον τηε σχρεεν. Ψου χαν χηανγε ιτ ιντο α δεσιρεδ ναµε. “Βλυετοοτη∗ ∆εϖιχε Αδδρεσσ”: Τηε αδ− δρεσσ πεχυλιαρ το - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 972
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ ΧΗΑΝΓΙΝΓ Α “∆ΕςΙΧΕ ΝΑΜΕ” Ψου χαν χηανγε α “∆εϖιχε Ναµε”. Ιφ ψου χηανγε α “∆εϖιχε Ναµε”, τηε ναµε ρεγιστερεδ ιν ψουρ χελλυλαρ πηονε ισ νοτ χηανγεδ. 1. Τουχη “Χηανγε”. (δ) Χηανγινγ τηε Βλυετοοτηr σεττινγσ Ψου χαν χηανγε τηε δισπλαψ ανδ σεττινγσ οφ Βλυετοοτηr ινφορµατιον ον τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 973
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Ωηεν ψου χηανγε τηε “∆εϖιχε Ναµε” ορ “ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 974
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Ινιτιαλιζινγ τηε Βλυετοοτηr σεττινγσ Ψου χαν ινιτιαλιζε τηε σεττινγσ. D ∆ελετινγ α Βλυετοοτηr πηονε 1. Τουχη “∆εφαυλτ”. 1. Τουχη πηονε”. “∆ελετε” οφ “Βλυετοοτη∗ 2. Τουχη “Ψεσ”. 2. Σελεχτ τηε τελεπηονε ψου ωαντ το δε− λετε. “Ινφορµατιον”: ∆ισπλαψ τηε ινφορµατιον οφ τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 975
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Σπεεχη χοµµανδ σψστεµ (ε) Ινιτιαλιζινγ αλλ ηανδσ!φρεε σεττινγσ Ψου χαν ινιτιαλιζε αλλ τηε ηανδσ!φρεε σετ− τινγσ. Τηε φολλοωινγ δατα ιν τηε σψστεµ χαν βε ινιτιαλιζεδ. D - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 976
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ 2. Γιϖε α χοµµανδ ωηιλε αν ινδιχατορ ισ σηοων ιν τηε δισπλαψ. Ιφ ψου ωαντ το χηεχκ τηε χοµµανδ λιστ, τουχη “Ηελπ” το δισπλαψ τηε ηελπ σχρεεν. (Σεε “Ηελπ σχρεεν” ον παγε 191.) Ωηεν ψου τουχη “Χανχελ”, τηε πρεϖιουσ σχρεεν ρετυρνσ. Ιφ τηε ναϖιγατιον σψστεµ δοεσ νοτ ρεσπονδ ορ τηε - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 977
1 2 Woodridge Avenue 4 Cancel 3 Cancel Help Enter destination D D 190 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 978
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Ηελπ σχρεεν Τηισ σψστεµ ηασ α φυνχτιον ωηιχη δισ− πλαψσ τηε ϖοιχε ρεχογνιτιον ηελπ σχρεεν. Ψου χαν σεε τηε χοµµανδ λιστ ανδ οπερατινγ γυιδε ον ιτ. (α) Χοµµανδ λιστ 1. Ιφ τηε “Οπερατινγ Γυιδε” σχρεεν ισ δισπλαψεδ, τουχη “Χοµµανδ Λιστ” ον τηε υππερ σιδε οφ τηε σχρεεν. (β) Οπερατινγ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 979
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Σχρεεν αδϕυστµεντ Τηε βριγητνεσσ ορ χοντραστ οφ τηε σχρεεν χαν βε αδϕυστεδ δεπενδινγ ον τηε βριγητ− νεσσ οφ ψουρ συρρουνδινγσ. Ψου χαν αλσο τυρν τηε δισπλαψ οφφ. Ιφ ψουρ ϖεηιχλε ισ εθυιππεδ ωιτη τηε ρεαρ σεατ εντερταινµεντ σψστεµ, τηε ρεαρ σχρεεν τυρνσ ον ορ οφφ ωηεν “Ρεαρ” ισ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 980
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ 1. Τουχη τηε δεσιρεδ βυττον το αδϕυστ χολορ ανδ τονε. Ψου χαν αδϕυστ τηε χολορ ανδ τηε τονε ωηιλε τηε ∆ς∆ ϖιδεο, ∆ς∆ αυδιο ανδ ϖιδεο Χ∆ αρε βεινγ πλαψεδ. “Χολορ” “Ρ”: Στρενγτηενσ τηε ρεδ χολορ οφ τηε σχρεεν. “Χολορ” “Γ”: Στρενγτηενσ τηε γρεεν χολορ οφ τηε σχρεεν. “Τονε” “+”: - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 981
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Σχρεεν σεττινγ (α) Αυτοµατιχ τρανσιτιον Ψου χαν σελεχτ α φυνχτιον τηατ εναβλεσ αυ− τοµατιχ ρετυρν το τηε ναϖιγατιον σχρεεν φροµ τηε αυδιο/αιρ χονδιτιονερ σχρεεν. 1. - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 982
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ (β) Σωιτχη χολορ Ψου χαν σελεχτ τηε χολορ οφ τηε τουχη! σχρεεν βυττονσ. (χ) Ρεαρ σψστεµ λοχκ (ωιτη ρεαρ σεατ εντερταινµεντ σψστεµ) Ιφ τηε ϖεηιχλε ισ εθυιππεδ ωιτη τηε ρεαρ σεατ εντερταινµεντ σψστεµ, τηε ρεαρ σεατ εντερ− ταινµεντ σψστεµ χαν βε λοχκεδ το πρεϖεντ ρεαρ πασσενγερσ φροµ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 983
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ (δ) ∆ελετε περσοναλ δατα Τηε φολλοωινγ περσοναλ δατα χαν βε δε− λετεδ ορ ρετυρνεδ το τηειρ δεφαυλτ σεττινγσ: D Μαιντενανχε χονδιτιονσ D Μαιντενανχε ινφορµατιον “οφφ” σετ− τινγ D Μεµορψ ποιντσ D Αρεασ το αϖοιδ D - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 984
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Βεεπ σεττινγ Ψου χαν σετ α βεεπ σουνδ οφφ. Χλοχκ αδϕυστµεντ Τηε χλοχκ χαν βε χορρεχτεδ µανυαλλψ ορ βψ υσινγ σιγναλσ φροµ τηε Γ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 985
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ D Το αδϕυστ α χλοχκ αυτοµατιχαλλψ D Το αδϕυστ α χλοχκ µανυαλλψ Βεφορε ψου υσε τηε αυτο αδϕυστ φυνχτιον, σελεχτ τηε τιµε ζονε (σεε “Τιµε Ζονε” δε− σχριβεδ βελοω). Τουχη “ΟΝ” οφ “Αυτο Αδ− ϕυστ”. Τηε τιµε ισ αυτοµατιχαλλψ αδϕυστεδ βψ τηε Γ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 986
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ Σελεχτινγ α λανγυαγε D Το σετ δαψλιγητ σαϖινγ τιµε Τηε λανγυαγε οφ τηε τουχη!σχρεεν βυτ− τονσ, ποπ!υπ µεσσαγεσ ανδ τηε ϖοιχε γυιδανχε χαν βε χηανγεδ. “∆αψλιγητ Σαϖινγ Τιµε”: Ψου χαν σετ ορ χανχελ τηε δαψλιγητ σαϖινγ τιµε. Το σετ τηε δαψλιγητ σαϖινγ τιµε τουχη “ΟΝ”, το χανχελ ιτ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 987
ΟΤΗΕΡ ΦΥΝΧΤΙΟΝΣ 3. Τουχη “Ενγλιση”, “Φραναισ” ορ “Εσ− πα〉ολ” το σελεχτ α λανγυαγε. Ιφ α σχρεεν οτηερ τηαν φορ τηε ναϖιγατιον σψστεµ ισ δισπλαψεδ, τηε χυρρεντ σχρεεν ωουλδ χηανγε το τηε “ΧΑΥΤΙΟΝ” σχρεεν βψ πυσηινγ τηε “ΜΑ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 988
SECTION D D 6 202 204 201 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 989
. Most window tinting contains some metallic content that will interfere with GPS signal reception of the antenna in the instrument panel. We advise against the use of window tinting on vehicles equipped with navigation systems. 202 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 990
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D INFORMATION If your vehicle cannot receive GPS signals, you can correct the current position manually. For information on setting the current position calibration, see page 114. D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 203 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 991
Α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 992
Α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 993
Α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 994
Α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 995
Α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 996
Α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 997
Α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 998
Α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 999
Α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1000
Α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1001
Α - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1002
Thank you for your purchase of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times. The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accessories ever developed. The system receives satellite signals - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1003
that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations that may affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle's position depends on the satellite condition, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances. For more information on the limitations of - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1004
Important information about this manual Safety Instruction CAUTION This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others. NOTICE This is - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1005
safety, the driver should not operate the navigation system while he/she is driving. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic may cause an accident. D While driving, be sure to obey the traffic regulations and maintain awareness of the road conditions. If a traffic sign on the road has been - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1006
Θυιχκ γυιδε — — Οϖερϖιεω βυττονσ ανδ γυιδανχε σχρεεν Νο. 1 2 Ναµε Νορτη!υπ ορ ηεαδινγ!υπ σψµβολ Σχαλε ινδιχατορ “AAΟΦΦ” Φυνχτιον Τηισ σψµβολ ινδιχατεσ α µαπ ϖιεω ωιτη νορτη!υπ ορ ηεαδινγ!υπ. Τουχηινγ τηισ σψµβολ χηανγεσ τηε µαπ οριεντατιον. Τηισ φιγυρε ινδιχατεσ τηε µαπ σχαλε. Τουχη τηισ βυττον - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1007
Νο. 6 Ναµε “Μαρκ” Ζοοµ ουτ βυττον “ΙΝΦΟ” βυττον “∆ΙΣ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1008
— Ρεγιστερινγ ηοµε 1 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1009
5 Τουχη “ΟΚ”. 0U5036L Ρεγιστρατιον οφ ηοµε ισ χοµπλετε. Ψου χαν αλσο ρεγιστερ ηοµε βψ πυσηινγ τηε “ΜΕΝΥ” βυττον. (Σεε “ — Ρεγιστερινγ ηοµε” ον παγε 100.) Ψου χαν χηανγε τηε ιχον, θυιχκ αχχεσσ, ναµε, λοχατιον ανδ πηονε νυµβερ. (Σεε “ — Εδιτινγ µεµορψ ποιντσ” ον παγε 94.) 8 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1010
— Ρεγιστερινγ πρεσετ µεµορψ ποιντ (Θυιχκ αχχεσσ) 1 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1011
5 Τουχη “ΟΚ”. 0U5062L Ρεγιστρατιον οφ τηε πρεσετ µεµορψ ποιντ ισ χοµπλετε. Ψου χαν αλσο ρεγιστερ πρεσετ δεστινατιονσ βψ πυσηινγ τηε “ΜΕΝΥ” βυττον. (Σεε “ — Ρεγιστερινγ µεµορψ ποιντσ” ον παγε 93.) Ψου χαν χηανγε τηε ιχον, θυιχκ αχχεσσ, ναµε, λοχατιον ανδ πηονε νυµβερ. (Σεε “ — Εδιτινγ µεµορψ - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1012
— Οπερατιον φλοω: γυιδινγ τηε ρουτε 1 - 2009 Lexus LX 570 | Owners Manual - Page 1013
— Σεττινγ ηοµε ασ τηε δεστινατιον 1
-
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
7 -
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
-
166
-
167
-
168
-
169
-
170
-
171
-
172
-
173
-
174
-
175
-
176
-
177
-
178
-
179
-
180
-
181
-
182
-
183
-
184
-
185
-
186
-
187
-
188
-
189
-
190
-
191
-
192
-
193
-
194
-
195
-
196
-
197
-
198
-
199
-
200
-
201
-
202
-
203
-
204
-
205
-
206
-
207
-
208
-
209
-
210
-
211
-
212
-
213
-
214
-
215
-
216
-
217
-
218
-
219
-
220
-
221
-
222
-
223
-
224
-
225
-
226
-
227
-
228
-
229
-
230
-
231
-
232
-
233
-
234
-
235
-
236
-
237
-
238
-
239
-
240
-
241
-
242
-
243
-
244
-
245
-
246
-
247
-
248
-
249
-
250
-
251
-
252
-
253
-
254
-
255
-
256
-
257
-
258
-
259
-
260
-
261
-
262
-
263
-
264
-
265
-
266
-
267
-
268
-
269
-
270
-
271
-
272
-
273
-
274
-
275
-
276
-
277
-
278
-
279
-
280
-
281
-
282
-
283
-
284
-
285
-
286
-
287
-
288
-
289
-
290
-
291
-
292
-
293
-
294
-
295
-
296
-
297
-
298
-
299
-
300
-
301
-
302
-
303
-
304
-
305
-
306
-
307
-
308
-
309
-
310
-
311
-
312
-
313
-
314
-
315
-
316
-
317
-
318
-
319
-
320
-
321
-
322
-
323
-
324
-
325
-
326
-
327
-
328
-
329
-
330
-
331
-
332
-
333
-
334
-
335
-
336
-
337
-
338
-
339
-
340
-
341
-
342
-
343
-
344
-
345
-
346
-
347
-
348
-
349
-
350
-
351
-
352
-
353
-
354
-
355
-
356
-
357
-
358
-
359
-
360
-
361
-
362
-
363
-
364
-
365
-
366
-
367
-
368
-
369
-
370
-
371
-
372
-
373
-
374
-
375
-
376
-
377
-
378
-
379
-
380
-
381
-
382
-
383
-
384
-
385
-
386
-
387
-
388
-
389
-
390
-
391
-
392
-
393
-
394
-
395
-
396
-
397
-
398
-
399
-
400
-
401
-
402
-
403
-
404
-
405
-
406
-
407
-
408
-
409
-
410
-
411
-
412
-
413
-
414
-
415
-
416
-
417
-
418
-
419
-
420
-
421
-
422
-
423
-
424
-
425
-
426
-
427
-
428
-
429
-
430
-
431
-
432
-
433
-
434
-
435
-
436
-
437
-
438
-
439
-
440
-
441
-
442
-
443
-
444
-
445
-
446
-
447
-
448
-
449
-
450
-
451
-
452
-
453
-
454
-
455
-
456
-
457
-
458
-
459
-
460
-
461
-
462
-
463
-
464
-
465
-
466
-
467
-
468
-
469
-
470
-
471
-
472
-
473
-
474
-
475
-
476
-
477
-
478
-
479
-
480
-
481
-
482
-
483
-
484
-
485
-
486
-
487
-
488
-
489
-
490
-
491
-
492
-
493
-
494
-
495
-
496
-
497
-
498
-
499
-
500
-
501
-
502
-
503
-
504
-
505
-
506
-
507
-
508
-
509
-
510
-
511
-
512
-
513
-
514
-
515
-
516
-
517
-
518
-
519
-
520
-
521
-
522
-
523
-
524
-
525
-
526
-
527
-
528
-
529
-
530
-
531
-
532
-
533
-
534
-
535
-
536
-
537
-
538
-
539
-
540
-
541
-
542
-
543
-
544
-
545
-
546
-
547
-
548
-
549
-
550
-
551
-
552
-
553
-
554
-
555
-
556
-
557
-
558
-
559
-
560
-
561
-
562
-
563
-
564
-
565
-
566
-
567
-
568
-
569
-
570
-
571
-
572
-
573
-
574
-
575
-
576
-
577
-
578
-
579
-
580
-
581
-
582
-
583
-
584
-
585
-
586
-
587
-
588
-
589
-
590
-
591
-
592
-
593
-
594
-
595
-
596
-
597
-
598
-
599
-
600
-
601
-
602
-
603
-
604
-
605
-
606
-
607
-
608
-
609
-
610
-
611
-
612
-
613
-
614
-
615
-
616
-
617
-
618
-
619
-
620
-
621
-
622
-
623
-
624
-
625
-
626
-
627
-
628
-
629
-
630
-
631
-
632
-
633
-
634
-
635
-
636
-
637
-
638
-
639
-
640
-
641
-
642
-
643
-
644
-
645
-
646
-
647
-
648
-
649
-
650
-
651
-
652
-
653
-
654
-
655
-
656
-
657
-
658
-
659
-
660
-
661
-
662
-
663
-
664
-
665
-
666
-
667
-
668
-
669
-
670
-
671
-
672
-
673
-
674
-
675
-
676
-
677
-
678
-
679
-
680
-
681
-
682
-
683
-
684
-
685
-
686
-
687
-
688
-
689
-
690
-
691
-
692
-
693
-
694
-
695
-
696
-
697
-
698
-
699
-
700
-
701
-
702
-
703
-
704
-
705
-
706
-
707
-
708
-
709
-
710
-
711
-
712
-
713
-
714
-
715
-
716
-
717
-
718
-
719
-
720
-
721
-
722
-
723
-
724
-
725
-
726
-
727
-
728
-
729
-
730
-
731
-
732
-
733
-
734
-
735
-
736
-
737
-
738
-
739
-
740
-
741
-
742
-
743
-
744
-
745
-
746
-
747
-
748
-
749
-
750
-
751
-
752
-
753
-
754
-
755
-
756
-
757
-
758
-
759
-
760
-
761
-
762
-
763
-
764
-
765
-
766
-
767
-
768
-
769
-
770
-
771
-
772
-
773
-
774
-
775
-
776
-
777
-
778
-
779
-
780
-
781
-
782
-
783
-
784
-
785
-
786
-
787
-
788
-
789
-
790
-
791
-
792
-
793
-
794
-
795
-
796
-
797
-
798
-
799
-
800
-
801
-
802
-
803
-
804
-
805
-
806
-
807
-
808
-
809
-
810
-
811
-
812
-
813
-
814
-
815
-
816
-
817
-
818
-
819
-
820
-
821
-
822
-
823
-
824
-
825
-
826
-
827
-
828
-
829
-
830
-
831
-
832
-
833
-
834
-
835
-
836
-
837
-
838
-
839
-
840
-
841
-
842
-
843
-
844
-
845
-
846
-
847
-
848
-
849
-
850
-
851
-
852
-
853
-
854
-
855
-
856
-
857
-
858
-
859
-
860
-
861
-
862
-
863
-
864
-
865
-
866
-
867
-
868
-
869
-
870
-
871
-
872
-
873
-
874
-
875
-
876
-
877
-
878
-
879
-
880
-
881
-
882
-
883
-
884
-
885
-
886
-
887
-
888
-
889
-
890
-
891
-
892
-
893
-
894
-
895
-
896
-
897
-
898
-
899
-
900
-
901
-
902
-
903
-
904
-
905
-
906
-
907
-
908
-
909
-
910
-
911
-
912
-
913
-
914
-
915
-
916
-
917
-
918
-
919
-
920
-
921
-
922
-
923
-
924
-
925
-
926
-
927
-
928
-
929
-
930
-
931
-
932
-
933
-
934
-
935
-
936
-
937
-
938
-
939
-
940
-
941
-
942
-
943
-
944
-
945
-
946
-
947
-
948
-
949
-
950
-
951
-
952
-
953
-
954
-
955
-
956
-
957
-
958
-
959
-
960
-
961
-
962
-
963
-
964
-
965
-
966
-
967
-
968
-
969
-
970
-
971
-
972
-
973
-
974
-
975
-
976
-
977
-
978
-
979
-
980
-
981
-
982
-
983
-
984
-
985
-
986
-
987
-
988
-
989
-
990
-
991
-
992
-
993
-
994
-
995
-
996
-
997
-
998
-
999
-
1,000
-
1,001
-
1,002
-
1,003
-
1,004
-
1,005
-
1,006
-
1,007
-
1,008
-
1,009
-
1,010
-
1,011
-
1,012
-
1,013
 |
 |
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors,
and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-
yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or
is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle
specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt in-
structions for Canadian owners
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.